ab number old of ewsd

254

Click here to load reader

Upload: phnthnhnm

Post on 29-Jan-2016

220 views

Category:

Documents


52 download

DESCRIPTION

ANB

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

1

Contents

1 Database Objects of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network 3

1.1 Definition 4

1.2 Assigning the Database Objects to MML Commands 6

1.3 Command Sequence for Creation and Cancellation of Inter-Exchange Circuit Connections 8

2 CP Digit Translators 11

2.1 Administration of the Called Party Address CdPA Digit Translation 12

2.2 Intercept Handling 34

2.3 Administration of the Traffic Type Digit Translation 38

2.4 Administration of Code Block Points for Call Gapping and Percentage Call Blocking 40

2.5 Administration of Code Block Point Groups for Call Rate Reduction (Leaky Bucket) 44

2.6 Administration of Traffic Discrimination Digits and Country Code 52

2.7 Administration of the Calling Party Address CgPA Digit Translation (A-DN Screening) 54

3 Destination Areas 61

3.1 Destination Areas with Fixed Alternative Routing (FAR) 64

3.2 Destination Areas with Repeated Digit Translation 70

3.3 Destination Areas with Optimized Dynamic Routing (ODR) 78

4 Routes 95

4.1 Standard Routing 96

4.2 Changing the Hunting Sequence 106

4.3 Rerouting 108

4.4 Routes Formed by Trunk Group Clusters 112

5 Trunk Groups 121

5.1 Functionality 122

5.2 MML Commands 124

5.3 Important GCOS Values 128

5.4 Overload Control 138

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

Page 2: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

2

5.5 Further Values of Trunk Groups 140

6 Trunks 145

6.1 Functionality and MML Commands 146

6.2 Self-Supervision and Operational Status of Digital Trunks 150

6.3 Nailed-up Connection 154

6.4 CCS No 7 Trunk Testing 158

7 Administration of Selective Trunk Reservation 161

7.1 Functionality 162

7.2 MML Commands for Trunk Reservation 164

7.3 Traffic-oriented Example 168

7.4 Code-oriented Example 170

8 Administration of the Carrier Access Code CAC Dependent Routing in Deregulated Networks 173

8.1 Input Format for Dialing Information with CAC 176

8.2 Possibilities for Carrier Selection 178

8.3 MML Commands for CAC Administration 180

8.4 CAC Administration on Subscriber Level 182

8.5 Application of the CAC in the Digit Translation 184

8.6 Example 194

9 Flexible Routing via PA 199

10 Administration of Announcement Groups and Lines 209

10.1 Function 210

10.2 Access to an Announcement Unit 212

10.3 MML Commands 218

11 Testing of the Basic Routing Function 223

12 Exercise 229

13 Solutions 239

Page 3: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

3

1 Database Objects of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

Page 4: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

4

1.1 Definition

The objective of administration of the user channel network (which is referred to in the official documentation as routing database administration, is to convert received dialing information into the equipment number of a time slot on a PCM carrier which has to be used for the outgoing connection. This procedure is based on the network architecture and the network parameters (signaling, numbering diagrams, etc.).

��CODE - DESTINATION AREA

The dialing information (CODE) is seen as an input for routing. In the first step, it is evaluated and the result is the determination of to the destination area in the network to be addressed.

��DESTINATION AREA - ROUTE

Because there are several possibilities for reaching the destination area depending on the network configuration, one must select a route. There are usually routes to the terminating nodes which go directly without diversions over other nodes. These routes are called direct routes and are the first choice. There are also routes which are assigned if the first choice route does not have free PCM time slot capacity. These routes are referred to as alternative or overflow routes.

��ROUTE - TRUNKGROUP

A route is defined both by the destination area to which it leads and by the physical PCM time slots through which the user information may be transmitted to the destination area. The PCM time slots are arranged in groups for administrative reasons; to make them easier to assign to routes and to make it easier to administrate common attributes of these time slots. These PCM time slot groups are called trunk groups.

��TRUNKGROUP - TRUNK

As already described, a trunk group is an administrative group of PCM time slots to a neighboring node. These PCM time slots are called trunks.

Page 5: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

5

SIEMENS D 900 SIEMENS D 900

Code

Destination

Area

Trunks

Trunks

Route

Route

Trunk

group

Trunk

group

SIEMENS D 900 SIEMENS D 900

e.g. further

routing

SIEMENS D 900 SIEMENS D 900

SIEMENS D 900 SIEMENS D 900

0 1

2 ... 3

0 3

1

0 1 2 ... 3

0

31

Fig. 1 Basic routing objects

Page 6: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

6

1.2 Assigning the Database Objects to MML Commands

��In digit translation, dialing information (CODE) received from the periphery is in the simplest case, directly converted to a destination area. The allocation of CODE and destination area is made with the command CR CPT.

��The destination area data contains all destination-specific information. The desti-nation area is created with the command CR DEST.

��Several routes can be allocated to one destination area. A route is a trunk group which can be used to make a connection to a specific destination area. Due to its destination-specific application, the trunk group can be assigned destination-specific parameters. A route is created with the command CR ROUTE and links a destination area with a trunk group.

��A trunk group is a group of PCM time slots. The group as a whole can be allocated specific features such as signaling type, barring, etc.

A trunk group is created with the command CR TGRP. A trunk group can be used to reach several destinations, i.e. it can be used by several routes with different destinations.

��A trunk is the definition of the PCM time slot and the allocation to a trunk group. A trunk is created with the command CR TRUNK.

Page 7: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

7

Destination

Route

Trunk

......

......

......

Timeslot

Code

Timeslot

CR CPT

CR DEST

CR ROUTE

CR TGRP

CR TRUNK

Digit Translation

Route

Trunk Trunk Trunk

Trunkgroup Trunkgroup

from other

routes

from other

routes

from other

digit translator

results

Fig. 2 Routing base objects and the corresponding MML commands

Page 8: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

8

1.3 Command Sequence for Creation and Cancellation of Inter-Exchange Circuit Connections

Page 9: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

9

Creation of a new inter-exchange connection:

��Creation Destination CR DEST

��Creation Trunk groups CR TGRP

��Creation Trunks CR TRUNK

��Creation Routes CR ROUTE

��Creation Code point CR CPT

��Creation Zone point CR ZOPT

Cancelation of an inter-exchange connection:

��Cancelation Zone point CAN ZOPT

��Cancelation Code point CAN CPT

��Cancelation Route CAN ROUTE

��Cancelation Destination CAN DEST

��Blocking Trunks ENTR TRDAT

��Cancelation Trunks CAN TRUNK

��Cancelation Trunk group CAN TGRP

Fig. 3 MML command sequence

Page 10: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

10

Page 11: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

11

2 CP Digit Translators

Page 12: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

12

2.1 Administration of the Called Party Address CdPA Digit Translation

The digit translator evaluates for each call set up the digits (called party address CdPA) received from:

��a subscriber

��incoming/bothway trunk

��an IN service control point SCP

The evaluation may lead to:

1. a standard routing case (accessing a trunk for outgoing traffic)

2. a subscriber (terminating traffic)

3. an access of an IN SCP

4. an intercept

In other words, the digit translator translates a digit combination into a call handling order. Therefore so called code points CPT have to be set up with the MML command CR CPT.

Result of the digit translator Meaning

DEST=<destination area name> CdPA leads to a destination via standard routing

INCEPT= e.g. UNOBDEn CdPA requires intercept handling. (Codes, for example, that are cancelled in a way that they should now lead to a special announcement or tone)

TRATYP=CPTDN CdPA leads to a directory number of a subscriber or a PABX connected to the own exchange

TRATYP=

IN <name of the IN-service>

CdPA contains the number of an intelligent network service -> EWSD starts an interrogation at the IN Service Control Point determined by the name identifier (leads to a so called IN-TRIGGER created with CR INTRIG)

TIP All codes for which no (more) CPT was created have the standard result NOT CONNECTED and are handled by the standard intercept UNOBDE0.

Page 13: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

13

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Digit translation

Traffic to

intercept

handling

Outgoing

traffic and

announce-

ments

Intercept

handling Routing

ToneAnnouncement

Trunk connectionCCS7 connection

SIEMENS SIEMENS

partner

exchangeIN

SCP

IN

SCP

SIEMENS SIEMENS

Beep

Digits

to subscriber

or PABX

Setup

connection to

subscriber

or PABX

DAS

OCANEQ

partner

exchange

Setup Signaling

connection to

the SCP

IN traffic

Fig. 4 Functionality of the digit translator

Page 14: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

14

2.1.1 General Structure of the CdPA Digit Translator in the CP

The translation of digits is carried out by the LTG and the CP. The LTG performs a so-called digit pre-analysis (not discussed in this subsection). The main translating process is done by the CP. This is where all the necessary digits that are delivered by the LTG are translated and the respective result is accessed.

The CP digit translator has a tree structure. This tree is made up of the so-called digit translator blocks which are linked up with each other. Each block contains 16 digit translator elements representing the digits 0 to F. Each block evaluates one digit.

One of these blocks is defined as entry block (block 0). This is where the translation of all digit combinations begins. The other blocks the digits run through during trans-lation are filled and linked by the CP whenever a new code point is created by MML. For each received CdPA the digit translation starts in the entry block always, i.e. the first digit is used to access the according field in the entry block.

Then next digit is translated by branching to the block linked with the first digit. The index to this next block is written in the block element which was accessed by the first digit. Inside a block the digit to be translated is used as an index for finding the respective element. If, for example, the first digit is "0", the element 0 in the entry block will be accessed, if the second digit is "1", the element 1 in the block linked with the element 0 of the entry block will ,be accessed, etc..

Each block element contains a translation result. The initial result value is "not connected". With setting up the digit translator (CR CPT) the result is:

1. an index for a destination area or an index for intercept handling etc. (final result)

2. "come again with digits" and an index to a further translation block, if there are still other digits to be analyzed (intermediate result)

Page 15: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

15

Setup example:

The digit combination 089 is supposed to lead to the destination MUNICH. It is the first digit combination that is set up as a CODE POINT in this digit translator.

1. In the entry block (block 0) the element 0 is correspondingly assigned to the digit "0". As result "come again with digit" is entered. Now a new block is searched for in the database (all elements contain "not connected") and the new block's index entered in element 0 of block 0. As this setup is the first one to be administered, block 1 would be assigned as the new block for evaluation of the second digit for codes starting with 0.

2. In this block1 the result "come again with digit" is entered in the element 8. Now a new block (block 2 in our case) is searched for in the database and the new block's index is also entered in the element 8 of block 1. This new block 2 will be used for evaluation of the third digit for codes starting with 08.

3. In this block 2 the result "DEST=MUNICH" (destination area has to be set up before) is entered in the element 9.

evaluate next digit

F

E

5

4

3

2

1

0

Entry block (0) for evaluation of

first digit

Block (1)

for evaluation of

second digit iffirst digit = 0

not connected

not connected

not connected

not connected

. . .

. . .

CODE

(first digits

of CdPA)

not connected

F

E

8

3

2

1

0

evaluate next digit

not connected

not connected

. . .

not connected

. . .

Layout of Digit Translator DITDA after creation of the first CPT (089)

Block (2)

for evaluation of

third digit iffirst digit = 0 &

second digit =8

not connected

F

E

9

3

2

1

0

DEST=MUNICH

not connected

not connected

. . .

not connected

. . .

Link to

destination

table (DEADA)

not connected

F

E

9

3

2

1

0

not connected

not connected

not connected

. . .

not connected

. . .

not connected

F

E

9

3

2

1

0

not connected

not connected

not connected

. . .

not connected

. . .

not connected

F

E

9

3

2

1

0

not connected

not connected

not connected

. . .

not connected

. . .

not connected

F

E

9

3

2

1

0

not connected

not connected

not connected

. . .

not connected

. . .

not connected

F

E

9

3

2

1

0

not connected

not connected

not connected

. . .

not connected

. . .

not connected

F

E

9

3

2

1

0

not connected

not connected

not connected

. . .

not connected

. . .

All other blocks (3...n) of

DITDA are still unused

TipIf code points are already set up, the system simply

assigns the next available unused block. Therefore the block numbering has no significance

during the evaluation of the CdPA.

Fig. 5 Example of the digit translator's structure after creation of one CPT (089 for DEST=MUNICH)

Page 16: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

16

2.1.2 Extended Code Points

The digit translation provides the possibility to create ambiguous code points too.

For example one code point can be created with the digits 089 and a second code point with the digits 0891

1. All dialed digit combinations 089 plus at least one digit more unequal 1lead to the destination allocated to the CODE=089.

2. All digit combinations 0891 plus optional further digits lead to the destination allocated to the CODE=0891.

Example:

1. CR CPT: CODE=089, DEST=MUNICH; Three digit translator blocks are linked as usual. The element 9 in the last block points to the destination MUNICH.

2. CR CPT: CODE=0891, DEST=EXCEPTION; A further digit translator block is linked to the digit translator element, which has pointed before to the destination MUNICH. The result outgoing traffic to DEST = MUNICH remains in this element as a kind of preliminary result. In the new block all elements except for the element 1 (0891) contain the result “not connected” and the element 1 contains the result DEST=EXCEPTION. If the call processing finds such an element with the result “not connected” the call processing takes as the result the Destination MUNICH (standard case), which was found in the element 9 of the previous block.

Dialing Examples:

089 The system expects one digit more, otherwise the call is released

08900892

0893

....

0899

The system goes to the destination MUNICH, which was found in element 9 in the block for the third digit

0891 The system goes to the destination EXCEPTION

Page 17: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

17

evaluate next digit

F

E

5

4

3

2

1

0

e.g. not connected

F

E

8

3

2

1

0

Block for

first digit

(entry block 0) Block for

first digit=0

evaluate next digit

e.g. not connected

e.g. not connected

e.g. not connected

e.g. not connected

. . .

. . .

e.g. not connected

e.g. not connected

. . .

CODE

e.g. not connected

. . .

. . .

Destination

MUNICH

evatuate next digit

E

9

3

2

1

0

Block for

first digit=0 &

second digit=8

. . .

e.g.not connected

e.g. not connected

e.g. not connected

e.g. not connected

F

. . .

. . .

CR CPT:CODE=089,

DEST=MUNICH;

CR CPT:CODE=0891,

DEST=EXCEPTION;

E

9

3

2

1

0

Block for first digit=0

second digit=8

third digit =9

. . .

Not connected

F

Destination

EXCEPTION

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

to EXCEPTION

to MUNICH

to MUNICH

to MUNICH

to MUNICH

to MUNICH

to MUNICH

Fig. 6 Extended code points

WARNING Never create the CODE with exactly the number of digits you expect to be dialed, if you plan to create an extension later on. The system expects at least one digit more to be dialed.

Page 18: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

18

2.1.3 Code Points Depending on ORIG1, MFCAT, LAC or ZDIG

The following information can be evaluated in the digit translator in addition to the code received as CdPA:

��Originating Mark 1: ORIG1 value of a incoming/bothway trunk group, a subscriber or a PABX administered in the database of the own exchange. The ORIG1 value cannot be signaled between exchanges.

��MFC-Category: MFCAT of a subscriber The MFCAT value can be signaled between exchanges.

��Local area code:

a) LAC value of an incoming/bothway trunk group, a subscriber or PBX administered in the database of the own exchange.

b) LAC as part of the CdPA

A LAC can only be evaluated if before it was set up with ENTR AREACODE

��Language digit: ZDIG for operator traffic The ZDIG value can be signaled between exchanges.

These information units are internally treated in the digit translator as additional digits chained into the CdPA. The position of the chain-in can be specified in the MML command CR CPT, otherwise they are chained-in at the end of the code point determined with the CR CPT.

Exception: The LAC is chained-in as early as possible. If e.g. a CPT with the code 226 with evaluation of the LAC should be set up, the LAC evaluation takes place in the following way:

��If no other CPT (starting with 2) without LAC evaluation is already set up, the LAC evaluation will be chained-in after the first digit.

��If e.g. a CPT 238 without LAC evaluation is already set up, the LAC evaluation will be chained-in after the second digit

WARNING

The LAC of the calling party address CgPA transmitted by inter exchange signaling cannot be evaluated in the digit translator (it can only be used for A-side specific zoning).

Page 19: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

19

Special Identifiers in the Digittranslator

Originating Mark 1 (ORIG1) Originating mark assigned to a trunk

group or a subscriber

MFC Category (MFCAT) Subscriber category

Local Area Code (LAC) Local area code assigned to a trunk

group/a subscriber or received as

part of the CdPA

Z- Digit (ZDIG) Language digit for operator traffic

Fig. 7 Special identifiers in the digit translator

TIP

1. It is also possible to determine for specific code points that A-subscriber blockings (e.g. account suspension or screening list) are not evaluated, what is very important for the CPT leading to the emergency services. Theses code points must be created with the TRATYP=NBARCPT. Restrictions: - max. 15 digits long code - no special positioning of ORIG1, MFCAT...

2. It depends on the positioning of ORIG1, MFCAT... whether later further CPT with similar codes can be created without ORIG1, MFCAT...:

Example:

a) CRCPT: CODE=0872, ORIG1=10, DEST=AAA;

b) CR CPT: CODE=0873, DEST=BBB; Second command is accepted because the ORIG1 is requested after 0872 and not already after 087.

a) CRCPT: CODE=0972, ORIG1=10-2, DEST=CCC;

b) CRCPT: CODE=0973, DEST=DDD; Second command is rejected, because already after 09 the ORIG1 is requested in the digit translator.

Page 20: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

20

2.1.3.1 Originating Mark 1 in the Digit Translator

A code point in the digit translator with Originating Mark 1 is set up using the com-mand CR CPT: CODE=..., ORIG1=...,...;. The ORIG1 parameter contains two infor-mation units: ORIG1= a-b.

a: The Originating Mark 1 covers a value range of 0...3839.

b: The position of the Originating Mark indicates after which digit the ORIG1 is trans-lated

In the digit translator the ORIG1 is translated in the same way as normal digits. For this purpose the hexadecimal value of the ORIG1 is used:

ORIG1=0..3839: H'000...H'EFF

The three half-byte positions are now translated in one digit translator block each in the same way as dialing information, i.e. beginning with the highest-order half-byte, .

Example:

The MML command CR CPT:CODE=0.., ORIG1=20-1,...; was entered.

The first digit "0" is translated in the entry block.

As the ORIG1 needs to be translated after the first digit (ORIG1=20-1) the next three blocks are used for the origination.

Because ORIG1=20 results in H’014, it is translated in the following way:

1. The 0 is translated in the block for the first part of the ORIG1 translation

2. The 1 is translated in the second block

3. The 4 in the last block.

After the origination translation has been completed the translation of the digits continues.

TIP

If no ORIG1 is assigned to a trunk group or subscriber, connections from these sources can be arranged by entering ORIG1=0. If for a particular code the ORIG1=0 is not set up but at least one other ORIG1, connections requested from A-sides without this ORIG1 will be rejected.

TIP

If a CODE was set up with Originating Mark1 (e.g. CODE=089, ORIG1=20-1) and if you then try to set up a CODE with the same first digit or digits without Originating Mark1 (e.g. CODE=001) the command is rejected, because an Originating Mark1 block already exists after the first digit. (The number of same first digits is dependent on the position of the Originating Mark1.)

Page 21: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

21

Block for

first digit

(entry block 0)

Block for

ORIG1 second part

CODE

evaluate ORIG1

1st part

F

E

5

4

3

2

1

0

F

E

8

3

2

1

0

F

E

5

4

3

2

1

0

Block for

first digit=0

ORIG1=H'0..

evaluate digits

F

5

4

3

2

1

0

Block for

ORIG1 first

part

Block for

first digit=0

e.g. not connected

e.g. not connected

e.g. not connected

e.g. not connected

. . .

. . .

e.g. not connected

. . .

. . .

e.g. not connected

result

result

result

result

result

result

result

result

result

. . .

. . .

e.g. not connected

evaluate ORIG1

2 nd part

e.g. not connected

Block for

first digit=0

ORIG1=H'01.

continue

with digits

block for

ORIG1 third

part

evaluate ORIG1

3 rd part

Fig. 8 The digit translator's structure for CODE=0.., ORIG1=20-1,....

+

Page 22: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

22

A typical case in which the ORIG1 may be used in the digit translator are emergency service numbers. Depending on the caller's origin (=city section) calls are routed to the nearest police station although all callers dial the same number (110).

Page 23: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

23

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Example: CPT with ORIG1

CR CPT : CODE = 110,

DEST = POLA,

ORIG1 = 5;

CR CPT : CODE = 110,

DEST = POLB,

ORIG1 = 10;

City section A Exchange

LAC=089

City section B

dials 110

dials 110

DN= 556677

ORIG1= 10

DN= 445566

ORIG1=5

Police

city section B

Police

city section A

DEST=POLA

DEST=POLB

Fig. 9

Page 24: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

24

ORIG1 = DEF

The introduction of a so-called default originating mark facilitates the management of the digit translator in the case that:

for a code only one or a few originating mark(s) lead to specific destination (so-called exception destinations for this code) and

all other originating marks should, however, lead to the very same destination (so called standard destination for this code).

This led to a lot of MML commands without using the solution with a default ORIG1. Using the default ORIG1 :

the so-called exceptions must still be established with one command per ORIG1/destination area combination.

the remaining originating marks, which all lead to the same destination area, are however established with a single MML command with reference to the default case.

Code points with a default originating mark are displayed with the corresponding display commands DISP CPT/DIGITGP/DIGITCP.

The default originating Mark is realized in the digit translator in the following way:

The exception destination or exception destinations are created in the normal way.

Is a default ORIG1 used than the element "F" in the 1st ORIG1 block gets as the result the destination, which was specified in the MML command with ORIG1=DEF.

In case of the call processing comes to an ORIG1 element with the result "not connected, it automatically takes the result of element "F" of the first ORIG1 block for further processing.

Page 25: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

25

Default ORIG1

Solution without default ORIG1

CR CPT: CODE=08, ORIG1=0, DEST= dest1;

CR CPT: CODE=08, ORIG1=1, DEST= dest1;

CR CPT: CODE=08, ORIG1=2, DEST= dest1;

........... ........

CR CPT: CODE=08, ORIG1=20, DEST= dest2; EXCEPTION

............ .......

CR CPT: CODE=08, ORIG1=3839, DEST= dest1;

Solution with default ORIG1

CR CPT: CODE=08, ORIG1=20, DEST= dest2; EXCEPTION

CR CPT: CODE=08, ORIG1=DEF, DEST= dest1;

Fig. 10

F

E

8

3

2

1

0

Block for

ORIG1 first

part

evaluate ORIG1

2 nd part

F

E

5

4

3

2

1

0

not connected

not connected

not connected

not connected

not connected

evaluate ORIG1

3 rd part

outgoing traffic

E

4

3

2

1

0 not connected

not connected

not connected

come with digit

F

E

5

4

3

2

1

0

Block for

first digit

(entry block 0)

e.g. not connected

e.g. not connected

e.g. not connected

e.g. not connected

. . .

. . .

CODE

F

E

4

3

2

1

0

Block for

second digit

(first digit 0)

e.g. not connected

e.g. not connected

e.g. not connected

e.g. not connected

. . .

. . .

Block for

ORIG1 second

part

Block for

ORIG1 third

part

evaluate ORIG1

1st part

e.g. not connected

8

not connected

not connectedF

not connected

not connected

not connected

not connected

not connected

not connected

not connected

not connected

not connected

exception

destination

standard

destination

Contents of the digit translator after:

CR CPT: CODE= 08, ORIG1= DEF, DEST= DEST1 (standard destination);

CR CPT: CODE= 08, ORIG1= 20, DEST= DEST2 (exception destination);

outgoing traffic

in case of not connected

e.g. not connected

Fig. 11

Page 26: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

26

2.1.3.2 Local Area Codes LAC in the Digit Translator

Creating local area codes

Local area codes are entered in the digit translator by ENTR AREACODE (if the directory number volume of the exchange is ambiguous).

Ambiguity of directory number volume means that a calling party number can appear several times within a single exchange but only once per installed local area network. It is administered using the MML command ENTR DNATT:

1. The parameter DNVOL specifies whether the directory numbers within the entire exchange are ambiguous.

2. The parameter EVLAC = YES has the result that the local area code is evaluated in the digit translator.

Only the DLUs to which exactly one LAC is assigned (parameter DLU in ENTR AREACODE) are able to work in the so called stand alone service SAS. If the parameter DLUEM in the command MODCALLPOPT is set to true, the assignment has to be done for all DLUs (i.e. to each DLU exactly one LAC). If DLUEM is set to PARTLY, it is possibly to have DLUs to which no LAC is assigned. To these DLUs subscribers of different local areas can be connected but SAS is not possible.

WARNING A subsequent modification of the directory number attribute is possible only if no directory numbers have been created yet. Therefore it is advisable to set up the directory number volume ambiguously at the start, even if the directory number volume is unique initially. This saves the effort required for subsequent modification which involves first deleting the existing directory numbers along with their subscribers in order to then reinstall them for ambiguous (multiple) directory number volume.

Page 27: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

27

DN=445577

LAC=08176

DN=445566

LAC=08176

DN=445566

LAC=08178

DN=445577

LAC=08178

SIEMENS SIEMENS

LAC

08178

LAC

08176

ENTR DNATT: DNVOL = MULTIPLE,

EVLAC=YES;

ENTR AREACODE: LAC = 08178, [DLU=];

ENTR AREACODE: LAC = 08176, [DLU=];

Fig. 12

Page 28: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

28

Handling of the LAC in the digit translator

Ambiguity of directory numbers is solved in the digit translator by means of 3 special blocks inserted into the digit chain.

The use of the LAC parameter for code points requires that the LAC has been entered previously using the ENTR AREACODE command. With this command an internal index is allocated to the created LAC. This LAC-index consists of a 3 half byte hexadecimal number.

This LAC index is then used if a CPT is created with the parameter LAC. The index of the specified LAC is chained into the code of this code point. As the index range can lie between 1 and 3839, there 3 additional blocks chained-in.

In case of a call set up the LAC is determined in the following way:

1. If the CdPA includes a LAC, the first step of the digit translation determines the LAC index of the dialed LAC. After the LAC index is found, the digit translation starts again with the rest of the CdPA. If these digits lead to a CPT created with LAC, the previously determined LAC index is evaluated.

2. If the CdPA does not include a LAC but leads to a CPT created with LAC, the LAC index of the A-party is evaluated. This LAC index of the A-party is taken from the LAC value assigned to the calling subscriber or incoming/bothway trunk in the database of this exchange.

Example (see figure beside):

1. Creation of a local area code: ENTR AREACODE: LAC=02; Result: The LAC-index e.g.H'004 is assigned to the LAC 02, i.e. the code 02 leads in the digit translator to the result NEW TRANSLATION with holding the LAC-INDEX H'004 ready for the evaluation of the further digits of the CdPA

2. Creation of a CPT for terminating traffic to subscribers of the local area 02 with DN starting with 123: CR CPT: CODE=123, TRATYP=CPTDN, LAC=02; Result : If no other code point without LAC and first digit 1 was created before, the digit chain for this CPT is set up in the digit translator in the following way:

first step: digit=1, result=evaluate LAC index first part

second step: LAC-index first part=0, result=evaluate LAC index second part

third step: LAC-index second part=0, result=evaluate LAC index third part

fourth step: LAC-index third part=4, result=evaluate next digit of CdPA

fifth step: digit=2, result=evaluate next digit of CdPA

sixth step: digit=3, final result=go to directory number block 123 with LAC=02

Page 29: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

29

evaluate

LACIndex

2

1

0

Block for

first digit

F

E

5

4

3

2

1

0

F

E

Result: DN-block123

with LAC 02

Block for

first digit=1 &

LAC Index=4 &

second digit=2

evaluate next

digit

F

E

2

1

0

Block for

first digit=0

new translation,

LAC Index = 004

first digit=1 &

LAC Index=004

F

E

2

1

0

evaluate next

digit

dialed digits:

02 123xxx

dialed digits:

123xxx,

A-subscriberhas LAC 02

5

4

3

2

1

0

LAC INDEX

first part

evaluation for

first digit=1

evaluate LAC index

second part

5

4

3

2

1

0

LAC INDEX

third part

evaluation for

first digit=1 &

LAC index first

part=0 &

second part=0

evaluate next

digit

LAC INDEX

second part

evaluation for

first digit=1 &

LAC index first

part=0

evaluate LAC index

third part

5

4

3

2

1

0

Fig. 13 Example for LAC evaluation

Page 30: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

30

Distribution of one Local Area Code to different local exchanges

Examples beside:

SUB 1 (LAC=030, DN=27400) sets up calls:

called party address terminating subscriber

traffic type of the call

23420 SUB2 local

03023420

Call is only through connected if ENTRLOCDIAL:DIAL=LACDN was entered in EX1

SUB2 local

04023420 SUB4 national

Because the DN volume of EX2 is ambiguous, the received CdPA 23420 can only be translated successful if the A-LAC is known. This is important to know, because the LAC of the calling party address transmitted in the ISUP-IAM cannot be evaluated in the digit translator of the terminating exchange.

The following possibilities exist:

��The LAC 030 is assigned in EX2 by MML command to the trunk group coming in from exchange EX1. This LAC is then used for all incoming calls where the CdPA does not include a LAC but the accessed CPT requires a LAC.

��The so called "LAC insertion" is activated in the involved exchanges: ENTR DNATT: LACINSOC=Y. The insertion of the A-subscriber LAC in front of the called party address (transmitted via the SS7 message IAM) will take place for each outgoing call (OC), if

a) the A-subscriber has not dialed a LAC

b) and the B-directory number leads to a so called traffic type code point TRATCPT (will be explained later), which was created with EXTTONSN=Y.

Page 31: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

31

EX 1 LAC=030

EX 2 LAC=030 LAC=040

local call

long distance

call

LAC=030

LAC=030

LAC=040LAC=030

DLU

27400

SUB 1

030/

23421

030/

23420

SUB 2

SUB 3

040/

23420

SUB 4

MML example for distribution of a local area to multiple exchanges

EX 1 EX 2

CR CPT: CODE=23, DEST=EX 2,

LAC=030;

CR TGRP:TGNO=EX2, LAC=030,...;

CR CPT: CODE=27, DEST=EX1,

LAC=030;

CR TGRP: TGNO=EX1, LAC=030,...;

CR DN: DN=27000 && 27999,

LAC=030;

CR CPT: CODE=27, TRATYP=CPTDN,

LAC=030

CR DN: DN=23000 && 239999,

LAC=030;

CRCPT: CPDE=23, TRATYP=CPTDN,

LAC=030

Fig. 14 Subscribes in a local area connected to various exchanges

local area 030

local area 040

DN=88420

DN=23420

DN= 23420

DN=27400

SIEMENS

SIEMENS

trunk group

Dialed number:

23420IAM with

CgPA= 030 27400

CdPA= 030 23420 CRTRATCPT:

CODE=2,...,

EXTTONSN=Y;

and

ENTR DNATT:...,

LACINSOC=Y;

Dialed number:

23420

IAM with

CgPA= 040 88420

CdPA= 040 23420

Fig. 15 Application of the new feature LAC Insertion

Page 32: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

32

2.1.4 Overview: MML Commands for the Administration of the CdPA Digit Translation

Amongst other things the system provides the following commands for the creation, cancellation and logging of the CP digit translation: CR CPT, CAN CPT, DISP CPT.

��CR CPT:

The MML command CR CPT can be used to create a code point.

��CAN CPT:

If a code point is canceled it must be defined via the parameter CODE and if required via LAC, ORIG1 and MFCAT. You can enter an INCEPT value. Note that if #an INCEPT value other than UNOBDE0 is used this will not really cancel the code point. In this case the code point's structure is maintained and the end result is merely replaced with a reference to the intercept table. In other words, the code point cannot be overwritten.

��There are two MML commands for logging the digit translator: DISP CPT and DISP DIGITCP.

The command DISP CPT reproduces all the data that was entered with CR CPT for one, several or all code points.

The command DISP DIGITCP reproduces data of all codes (CPT, LAC, TEPT, SCFEA) of the digit translator (but not all data of the codes). It is very useful for gaining an overview of all the used digit combinations or of all codes starting with selected digits.

Creation of Codepoints

Codepoint for a destination (outgoing traffic)

CR CPT: CODE= ,DEST= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] ;

Codepoint for an intercept

CR CPT: CODE= ,INCEPT= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=];

Codepoint for terminating traffic

CR CPT: CODE= ,TRATYP= CPTDN [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=];

Fig. 16 MML commands for creating code points

Page 33: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

33

Cancelation of Codepoints

CAN CPT: CODE= [,INCEPT=] [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=];

Fig. 17 MML commands for canceling code points

Display of Codepoints

DISP CPT: CODE= ;

DISP CPT: {DEST= | INCEPT= | TRATYP= | ORIG1= | MFCAT= |

ROUTYP= | ZDIG= | PROVNAM=} [,CODE=] ;

DISP DIGITCP: [CODE=] [,ORIG1=] ;

DISPDIGITCP;

DIGIT TRANSLATION DATA

CODE LAC ZDIG MFCAT ORIG1 RESULT

ROUTYP

------------------------+---------+----+-----------+------+--------

030 OUTGOING

089 OUTGOING

091 NEWTRANS

3011 091 - 1 TERMTRAF

8000 091 - 1 TERMTRAF

8001 091 - 1 TERMTRAF

8002 091 - 1 TERMTRAF

END JOB 7795 EXEC'D

Fig. 18 MML commands for creating code points

TIP

With MODCPT only specific data of a CPT can be modified (DEST, INCEPT or TRATYP)

Page 34: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

34

2.2 Intercept Handling

2.2.1 Functionality

The Intercept Handling usually serves to deal with those situations that differ from the normal call setup. I.e. the so-called "Reason for Call Failure" or "Reason for Call Termination" are allocated to a system reaction such as tone or announcement.

Examples of branching to the intercept handling:

1. ISUP Backward Release Cause such as: "no circuit / channel available", "No route to destination", "unallocated number" etc. The respective causes are linked to a symbolic intercept value (INCEPT) via a project specific mapping table.

2. Data base causes in the own exchange such as: digit translator delivers UNOBDEn, because the code has not been set up or is blocked, call rejected because A-subscriber has account suspension etc.

3. Accessing the intercept handling with individual announcement system functions (INDAS). I.e. individual announcement functions are controlled by the call proces-sing. Such a case always leads to the individual announcement system OCANEQ (Operationally Controlled Announcement Equipment).

4. Accessing an announcement from the intelligent network. The SCP (Service Control Point ) delivers an intercept number. This usually leads to an announcement in the DAS or OCANEQ via the digit converter.

As a result the intercept handling usually delivers a tone that is indicated as symbolic value, a new CODE for branching to the digit translator or a new DEST for directly branching to the destination areas.

Page 35: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

35

OCANEQ

standard and individual

announcementsDigital announcement

system

General

destinations

Intercept Handling

Intercept Result

new digit translation

or

new destination

tone

Intercept

Database

reasons

in the exchange

e.g.

Digit translator

UNOBDEn

Backward

causes

e.g. "no circuit /

no channel

available"

INDAS

function IN: SCP

PLAY

ANNOUNCE-

MENT

Fig. 19 Intercept handling

Page 36: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

36

2.2.2 MML Commands for the Administration of Intercepts

The intercept handling is set up with the MML command CR INC. You need to use different parameters depending on whether a tone is to be activated or whether branching to a destination area or to the digit translator is to be performed. In all cases you will need the parameter INCEPT. It indicates the cause, i.e. the reason for the withdrawal from the various data tables of the exchange. Intercepts can be interlinked with the parameter SEQ (sequence number). I.e. the intercept is to be set up several times with different results and ascending number in the SEQ parameter.

1. Accessing a tone:

The parameter TONE indicates the tone to be activated as symbolic value. The se-cond parameter unit indicates the tone duration in seconds. The tone frequencies and patterns are project specific.

2. Accessing the digit translator

The parameter CODE indicates a new code the digit translator is addressed with. Additionally, set the parameter INRES to NEWCOD. You can also specify the parameter TONE. The tone is then played in, if no announcement is possible.

3. Accessing a destination area

The DEST parameter is supplied with a destination area name to access the desti-nation area and with that an announcement for example. Set the parameter INRES to NEWDEST in this case.

Page 37: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

37

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Intercept Administration

Intercept with a tone

CR INC: INCEPT=, TONE= a-b [,SEQ=];

Intercept with a new code

CR INC: INCEPT=, INRES=NEWCOD,CODE= [,TONE= a-b][,SEQ=];

Intercept with a new destination area

CR INC: INCEPT=, INRES=NEWDEST, DEST= [,SEQ=];

Display of intercepts

DISPINC: <INCEPT=, INTYP= >;

Fig. 20 Intercept administration

Page 38: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

38

2.3 Administration of the Traffic Type Digit Translation

EWSD assigns to each call set up a so called traffic type TRAT. A TRAT is identified by a symbolic name (TRAT=) and includes call processing characteristics. Except the default TRAT=NOBLOCK all other up to 63 TRAT have to be created by CR TRAT. The assignment of the TRAT to a call is done by the TRAT digit translator which is applied for each call set up. This digit translator is filled with so called traffic code points TRATCPT (CR TRATCPT). If for a dialed code no TRATCPT is created, the default result TRAT=NOBLOCK is assigned automatically.

Beside the procedure of assigning a traffic type TRAT via the traffic type translator it is also possible to determine the TRAT via the zoning of a call:

CR ZOPT:...,ZOTRAT=<trat>;

Function of traffic types TRAT for call set up:

��Blocking of call set up for subscribers with traffic restriction

Example:

All calls with called party address starting with 0 are translated via TRATCPT 0 to TRAT=NAT (CR TRATCPT:CODE=0,TRAT=NAT).

A-subscriber has activated the traffic restriction class TRACL1 which includes the restriction for establishing calls with TRAT= NAT. Traffic classes are restricted for traffic types by command ENTRTRABLOCK:TRAT=NAT,TRACL=TRACL1.

If this subscriber starts dialing 0..... the call set up is rejected and handled by the intercept value, which is assigned to the TRAT (CR TRAT: TRAT=NAT,INCEPT=...).

��Restrictions for call diversion

It has to be defined for each traffic type TRAT whether call diversion is allowed to destination codes with this TRAT.

Example: Diversion to destination codes starting with 00 (TRAT=INAT) should be forbidden:

CRTRAT:TRAT=INAT,DIV=NO,INCEPT=......;

CR TRATCPT:CODE=00,TRAT=INAT;

Creation of TRATCPT in the traffic type translator:

��A TRATCPT can depend not only on the dialed code but also on the LAC of the A-side: CR TRATCPT: TRAT=, CODE=, LACOR=;

��It is possible to create a TRATCPT which code includes the code of an already created TRATCPT (e.g. CR TRATCPT: TRAT=NAT,CODE=0; and CRTRATCPT:TRAR=INAT,CODE=00;).

Page 39: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

39

dialed digits

TRAT of the call

check whether

- A-side is blocked for this TRAT

- Diversion is allowed

Traffic type translator: CR TRATCPT

all TRAT have to be

created by:

CR TRAT

all TRAT have to be

created by:

CR TRAT

CODE TRAT

0 NAT

00 INAT

8 with LOC1 LACOR=023

8 with LOC2LACOR=024

all other codes: NOBLOCK

Fig. 21

TIP The MML command CR TRATCPT includes the optional parameter EXTTONSN=Y. By this the LAC of the originating side is automatically added to a CdPA (if dialed without LAC).

Page 40: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

40

2.4 Administration of Code Block Points for Call Gapping and Percentage Call Blocking

2.4.1 Functionality and MML Commands

With the feature call gapping the rate of outgoing call attempts to a specific digit combination is controlled. This can be used to prevent the network and nodes from overload.

A certain percentage of seizure attempts can be blocked or the code point can be blocked during a fixed time interval (blocking interval). The destination (digit combination) to be blocked is defined as code block point (CBPT).

Call gapping

The blocking interval indicates the period during which the code is blocked for the seizure attempts following one permitted seizure attempt. On elapse of this blocking interval the code can be reached again.

Percentage blocking

If a percentage is specified 8 calls are used as basis for 100%.

Page 41: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

41

t

t

t

Successful call attempts with Blocking Percentage 25%:(2 calls blocked, next sixare through connected)

30 s 30 s 30 s

Offered calls

t

t

Successful call attempts with call Gapping blocking interval 30 s.

t

30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s

Fig. 22 Call gapping and percentage blocking example

Code blockpoint Administration

CR CBPT: CODE= (may be longer than codepoint CPT administered in same exchange)

[,LAC= ]

[,ORIGDC=]

[,CAT=]

[,ROUTYP=]

PERC=PERC0 or PERC12P5 or ... PERC100 or CGAP=SEC0 or SEC0P25 or SEC0P5 or SEC1 or ... SEC600 or INF

INCEPT=

Fig. 23 MML commands for code block points

Page 42: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

42

2.4.2 Example: Televoting during a TV Program

The problem of high traffic to only one destination is solved by reducing the traffic by passing through only every n-th call. The blocking should take place in the network as early as possible

In our example only 75% of the calls to the PBX (090722) with the televoting system will be passed through.

MML commands:

CR DEST:

DEST=DESTC; plus further inter exchange commands

CR CPT: CODE=090, DEST=DESTC;

CR CBPT:

CODE=090722, PERC=PERC25, INCEPT=NETWOMA1;.

Page 43: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

43

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS

CODE=

090722

CODE=

090722

Call

Gapping

Call

Gapping

SIEMENS SIEMENS

PBX

traffic to the televoting

system reduced to for

example 75% as early as

possible

televoting system

090722

A B

C 090

Fig. 24 Traffic reduction with call gapping

Page 44: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

44

2.5 Administration of Code Block Point Groups for Call Rate Reduction (Leaky Bucket)

2.5.1 The Leaky Bucket Model

The feature "Call Rate Reduction" (Leaky Bucket) blocks the outgoing traffic for one or more destinations. This is done by limiting with help of the „leaky bucket call limit rate“, the maximum mean rate of calls. Codes that have to be blocked are combined in code blocking point groups for this purpose. These groups represent the so-called buckets.

One „leaky bucket call limit rate“ is assigned to each bucket. „Leaky bucket limit call rate LBUCLCR” can take on values between 0.05 and 30 call attempts per second. Code blocking point groups and „leaky bucket limit call rate“ can be administered by MML command.

Call attempts rejected by Leaky Bucket go to an intercept.

The Leaky Bucket blockage method, which limits the outgoing traffic to a destination or group of destinations to a defined number of call attempts per unit of time, is suitable for overload protection tasks. Its mode of action can be illustrated with a simple model:

A bucket is filled gradually by seizures for one “code blocking point group” (group of codes). Once the bucket is full (depends on “bucket depth LBTHR” which can be between 1 and 256 call attempts), it begins to overflow, i.e. additional calls go to an intercept. As the bucket is leaky, however, its level drops constantly, meaning it can be continuously re-filled with calls. The loss rate of the bucket can be adjusted by MML command (adjustment via the nominal rate of calls offered, see example).

The bucket depth indicates the allowed number of call attempts to a bucket acceptable if the bucket was previously empty. The default value of the bucket depth is LBTHR=30, i.e. 30 call attempts.

The „leaky bucket call limit rate“, is the maximum mean rate of calls to certain destinations. The ratio of „leaky bucket limit call rate“ to the offered call rate determines how rapidly the bucket will be filled (or how fast the threshold value will be reached which results in rejection of the calls).

Page 45: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

45

Default: 30

contains

accepted calls

offered calls to one destination

or a group of destinations

number of calls

per second

Controlled by

MML Command

INTERCEPT

Overflow

if already 10

calls accepted

Fig. 25 Leaky bucket model

Page 46: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

46

2.5.2 Increment and Decrement of the Filling Level

The blocking mechanism determines the filling level of the bucket by upward and downward counting and comparing the counted value with a predefined threshold value. This value is set to 200.

��The upward count - filling of the bucket - takes place by event control due to a call attempt to the respective groups of destinations. The increment value of the upward count, i.e. the evaluation of the accepted call, is calculated as: "filling level" / "bucket depth"

��Downward counting takes place according to the decrement value per completed time interval (1sec). This value is calculated as: "increment value" x "leaky bucket call limit rate“

Example:

„leaky bucket limit call rate“ = 2 seizures / s (set by MML)

Bucket depth = 10 seizures (set by MML)

Threshold value = 200 (of filling level)

Increment value threshold value / bucket depth

= 20 / seizure (of filling level)

Decrement value ("increment value" x "leaky bucket call rate“:

20/seizure x 2 seizures/s=40/s)

= 40 / s

Page 47: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

47

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

t [s]

Offered

calls

1 2 3 4

t [s]1 2 3 4

filling

degree

[call attempts x 20]

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

180

160

200

Fig. 26 Example of call rate reduction

Page 48: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

48

2.5.3 MML Commands

Up to 16 selectable digit combinations can be combined to form one code blocking point group (CR CBPGRP).

CBPGRPs can be created, modified and canceled by MML. A maximum of 31 CBPGRPs with respectively 16 code block points or, alternatively, 500 CBPGRPs with respectively one code block point etc., can be created for Leaky Bucket. Following the creation, the CBPGRP is initially deactivated.

The blockage can be activated/deactivated by MML for each CBPGRP (ACT CBPGRP). One or more (up to 32) or all CBPGRPs can be activated or deactivated by one single MML command at a time.

A CBPGRP can be modified both in the activated and deactivated condition.

One, several or all CBPGRPs can be canceled with a single MML command. The CBPGRPs must be deactivated before they can be canceled, and no longer referred to by a code block point. The cancellation of several or all CBPGRPs will not be performed if one of the groups is still active.

Page 49: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

49

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Creation of a code blocking point group

CR CBPGRP: CBPGRP= , LBUCLCR={LCPS0P05....LCPS30P0} [,LBTHR=1,2,…30];

Creation of a code blocking point

CR CBPT: CODE= [,LAC=] [,ORIGDC=] [,CAT=] , CBPGRP= <predefined code blocking group> INCEPT= ;

Activation of a code blocking group

ACT CBPGRP: CBPGRP= {<predefined code blocking group> [&<cbpgrp>[...&<cbpgrp>]] | X};

Fig. 27 MML commands for leaky bucket

Page 50: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

50

2.5.4 Example for Leaky Bucket

The traffic mean rate to the frequently called destinations 08003 and 08006 and 01904 and 01905 should be limited.

1. Calls to these 0800 destinations should be limited to seize a maximum of 10 trunks. The mean holding time to these destinations is 30 s. The following estimation shows the traffic mean rate for these numbers: traffic mean rate [calls/s] = number of trunks / mean holding time [s] traffic mean rate =10/30s=0.33calls/s

2. Calls to these 0190 destinations should be limited to seize a maximum of 20 trunks. The mean holding time to these destinations is 10 s. The following estimation shows the traffic mean rate for these numbers: traffic mean rate [calls/s] = number of trunks / mean holding time [s] traffic mean rate =20/10s=2calls/s

With help of the MML commands on the opposite page the traffic mean rate to the mentioned 0800 destinations should be limited to 0.3 calls/s and to the 0190 destinations to 2calls/s.

Page 51: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

51

other

traffic

traffic

to 01904

and 01905

traffic

to 08003

and 08006

SIEMENS SIEMENS

SIEMENS SIEMENS

mean traffic rate

to 01904 and 01905

limited to 2 calls/sec

mean traffic rate

to 08003 and 08006

limited to 0.3 calls/sec

CODE

Fig. 28 Example of a leaky bucket application

CR CBPGRP : CBPGRP=CFREE, LBUCLCR=LCPS0P3;

CR CBPT : CODE = 08003, CBPGRP=CFREE, INCEPT= ;

CR CBPT : CODE = 08006, CBPGRP=CFREE, INCEPT= ;

ACT CBPGRP : CBPGRP=CFREE;

CR CBPGRP : CBPGRP=PRC, LBUCLCR=LCPS2P0;

CR CBPT : CODE = 01904, CBPGRP=PRC, INCEPT= ;

CR CBPT : CODE = 01905, CBPGRP=PRC, INCEPT= ;

ACT CBPGRP : CBPGRP=PRC;

Fig. 29 MML command example for leaky bucket

Page 52: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

52

2.6 Administration of Traffic Discrimination Digits and Country Code

Traffic Discrimination Digits

The so called traffic discrimination digits used as a prefix for national and international calls are administered in the following way:

ENTR DNATT: PFXNAT= national prefix e.g.0

PFXINAT= international prefix e.g.00

These prefixes are used to determine the so called "nature of address indicator" which is used inside the CCS7 ISUP signaling messages to specify whether the transmitted calling and called party addresses have to be evaluated as a subscriber number in the national or international format. Inside the CCS7 ISUP messages neither the national nor the international prefix is transmitted as part of the CdPA / CgPA.

Own Country Code

Mainly in international gateway exchanges the own country code may be added to the calling party address CgPA. By this it is guaranteed, that a B-subscriber with CLIP always receives a A-DN which can be used for a recall.

The own country code is administered in the following way:

ENTR CNTRYCOD:

CC= e.g. 49, OWNCC=YES;

Page 53: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

53

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PFXNAT=0

PFXINAT=00

Country

Code: 33

PFXNAT=0

PFXINAT=00

ExchangeGatewayLAC = 043

DN = 55555

dials

004989722...

IAM

called party

NA = international numberdigits: 49...

calling party:

NA=national number

digits=4355555

IAM

called partyNA = international number

digits: 49...

calling party:

NA= international number

digits=334355555

Fig. 30

Page 54: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

54

2.7 Administration of the Calling Party Address CgPA Digit Translation (A-DN Screening)

Subscriber individual (also called A number dependent) digit translation (ORIG1), zoning (ORIG2) or blocking can normally only be performed in the local exchange of the A-subscriber.

In transit or gateway exchanges without direct subscriber access the ORIG1/2 can only be assigned to incoming or bothway trunk groups, i.e. no subscriber individual originating marks are available because ORIG1/2 cannot be signaled.

If A subscriber individual call handling should take place in higher ranking exchanges, the A-DN received in the calling party address field CgPA of the ISUP IAM has to be evaluated there.

Therefore the A-DN (CgPA) oriented digit translator ORIG-DAT is necessary in these exchanges to offer following features:

1. A Number Screening (Blacklist / Whitelist Screening) If the A-party number is entered in the blacklist (or not entered in a whitelist), the call is not set up but leads to an intercept . In this case the ORIG-DAT translator is used as an exchange related screening list for incoming calls.

2. A Number dependant Routing Depending on the A-party number, the digit translation of the called party address CdPA can be manipulated by setting a new ORIG1 value.

3. A Number dependant Zoning Depending on the A-party number, the zoning translation of the called party address CdPA can be manipulated by setting a new ORIG2 value.

Advantages:

1. Barring of the network usage at the gateway exchange for certain subscribers (e.g. all subscribers who have no contract with this transit network operator).

2. Special routing for certain subscriber groups (subscriber related routing e.g. to service numbers)

3. A-party number dependent charging (various tariffs)

Whether the A-DN is evaluated in the ORIG-DAT depends on the GCOS value of the incoming / bothway trunk group:

GCOS=BLACKLST (or WHITELST) activates CgPA evaluation in the ORIG-DAT

Page 55: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

55

SIEMENS SIEMENS

Gateway or Transit Exchange

ORIG-DAT evaluation

ORIG-DATrequired?

Incoming

trunk group

GCOS=

BLACKLST

A-number

N

Y

004917288

NORIG 2 = 50

004917287

NORIG 2 = 51

Zoning

00491728645

NORIG 1 = 99

Routing

00491726132

NORIG 1 = 98

00491728943

00491729986

Blacklist

to zoning

translator

to digit-

translator

to

Intercept

to digit and zoning

translator

Fig. 31 CgPA evaluation

Page 56: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

56

The A number (CgPA) digit translator is filled with codes and results by means of the MML command CR ORIGDAT:

��The parameter CODE may define a complete A-DN (in national format, i.e. with LAC and DN) or a partial qualified CgPA, e.g. only the LAC or the LAC and the first digits of a DN-volume. The ORIG-DAT translator can max. use 260000 Blocks which means that depending on the length of the code up to about 100000 codes can be entered.

��The result of a code can be:

FEATURE = BLACKLST or WHITELST If the incoming trunk group has GCOS=BLACKLST the BLACKLIST screening is performed, i.e. only calls with A-DN not leading to the result BLACKLST are through connected. If the incoming trunk group has GCOS=WHITELST the WHITELIST screening is performed, i.e. only calls with A-DN leading to the result WHITELST are through connected. All blocked calls lead to the INCEPT=BLOCKLST: Additionally it is possible to exclude codes from the screening: Example: CODE=0897, FEATURE=BLACKLST CODE=089722, FEATURE=NOBLACK All incoming calls with CgPA starting with 0897 are rejected except the A-DN starts with 089722.

FEATURE=ROUTING, NORIG1=... A (new) ORIG1 is defined for the following digit translation of the CdPA of this call

FEATURE=CHARGING, NORIG2=... A (new) ORIG2 is defined for the following zoning of this call

��Furthermore it is possible to make the evaluation of the A-DN also dependant on the ORIG1 of the incoming trunk group. Then the A-DN is translated into the given result only if the incoming trunk group with GCOS=BLACKLST/WHITELST has the according ORIG1 defined in CR ORIGDAT .

��If a call is coming in on a TRGP with GCOS=BLACKLST/WHITELST but the CgPA is not available the call is rejected and the INCEPT=ANIFLST is accessed. This takes place if minimum to one code created with CR ORIGDAT the FEATURE=BLACKLST/WHITELST was assigned.

Page 57: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

57

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Creation of ORIGDAT translator

CR ORIGDAT: CODE=<A-party number or part of it>, ORIG1=<requested ORIG1 of the incoming TGRP> {FEATURE = BLACKLST or WHITELST or NOBLACK or NOWHITE, FEATURE = ROUTING,NORIG1= <new originating mark1>, FEATURE = CHARGING,NORIG2= <new originating mark2>};

Fig. 32 Creation of ORIGDAT

Page 58: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

58

Skip White/Black List Blocking for Certain Destinations

��A destination that shall be reachable by any calling party is administrated as a non-bearable code point. When the GP call processing recognized such a code point, beside other restrictions also a possibly set flag on black/white list evaluation (GCOS=BLACKLST/WHITELST) is reset by the GP call processing. Due to this reset value, the CP call processing skips the whole originating data evaluation, i.e. any black/white list evaluation or any routing and charging information concerning new ORIG1 / ORIG2.

��It is also possible to create destinations, for which only the blocking because of black/white list evaluation will be ignored. Within command CR TRATCPT ( create traffic type code point ) the parameter OVRBWLST is used to define whether a blockage due to black/white list evaluation has to be overridden or not. With the chosen solution the existing sequence of evaluation of the several digit tables by the CP call processing has been kept:

� A-Number Eval. � Digit Transl. � [...] � Traffic Type Determ. � [...]

Page 59: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

59

CR / MOD / DISP TRATCPT: CODE=..., TRAT=...[, OVRBWLST = { NO / YES } ] [,...] ;

Explanation of the new parameter :

OVRBWLST Override blockage due to black/white list evaluation result

NO No ( = default value )

YES Yes

Fig. 33

EXAMPLE FOR THE DESTINATION SPECIFIC SKIPPING OF BLOCKING BY

WHITELIST

Over trunk group number 17 only calls coming from area 089 are allowed.

Exception: The destination 0161 should be assessable by any A-subscriber.

CR TGRP: TGNO=17, OPMODE=BW, GCOS=WHITELST;

=> For calls via trunk group 17 an additional check on the A-number will be performed. If the A-number is not part of the white list, the connection will be rejected and a defined intercept treatment will be executed.

CR ORIGDAT: CODE=089, FEATURE=WHITELST;

=> Connection is allowed for calls coming from area 089. Any other connection has to be blocked.

CR TRATCPT: CODE=0161, TRAT=INTRNET, OVRBWLST=YES;

=> Any connection with destination 0161 will be set up, also those not coming from area 089.

TIP

Remark: Creation of a non barrable code point with a stem of 0161 would abolish the feature applied on this example, because a non barrable code point allows generally the call set up to a given destination, skipping among others the black/white list check.

Fig. 34

Page 60: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

60

Page 61: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

61

3 Destination Areas

Page 62: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

62

A destination area is accessed by analyzing the dialing information via one or more code points. There are several types of destination areas:

1. destination areas with fixed alternative routing

2. destination areas with repeated digit translation

3. destination areas with optimized dynamic routing

4. destination areas with routing dependent on the demanded transmission medium quality

5. destination areas with conditional alternative routing (carrier quoting)

Page 63: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

63

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Digit

translation

Destination with

fixed alternative

routing (standard

routing)

Destination with

repeat digit

translation

Destination with

conditional

alternative routing

(carrier destination)

Destination with

routing dependent

on transmission

medium required

Destination with

optimized dynamic

routing

Fig. 35 Different types of destination areas

Page 64: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

64

3.1 Destination Areas with Fixed Alternative Routing (FAR)

3.1.1 Functionality

Standard destination areas serve to access up to 16 routes. These routes usually lead to the selection of a trunk group for transferring outgoing calls to another switching center.

Fixed alternative routing is initiated by trunk group selection. In other words, the routes are checked in ascending hunting sequence to see whether there is at least one idle trunk available in the trunk group. The pending seizure is allocated to the first route in the hunting sequence which offers an idle trunk.

It is possible to create a final overflow code in the event that all lines of all possible routes are seized. This new digit combination is then fed into the digit translator so that a result can be found.

TIP

Fixed alternative routing can be deviated from by using the 'rerouting' service feature. Rerouting means that if an unsuccessful call setup attempt (i.e. an outgoing trunk group was successfully seized in the own exchange, but all accessed trunk groups are seized in a transit exchange) is undertaken, the connection is set up via a route which belongs to an alternative rerouting group from the previous route. This is carried out in order that the same transit exchanges are not re-accessed.

Rerouting will be discussed in the Route-Chapter.

Page 65: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

65

Digit

translation

Destination area with

fixed alternative routing

route hunting list

final overflow

code

Digits

1

Route

16

Route

Fig. 36 Standard destination

Page 66: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

66

3.1.2 MML Command

The destination can be created, cancelled and displayed. Following parameters are relevant:

��The destination name DEST the destination area is identified with can contain 6 or 12 characters depending on the project. This max. length can be set using the MML command MOD CALLPOPT: DESTMAXL= {SHORT|LONG}.

��If all the trunk groups of the routes have been seized, a repeated translation of digits can be carried out with the help of the code stored in the FOVCODE parameter.

��DEFEAT The destination can be marked with some characteristics leading to special call processing treatment.

AUTOINFO - Automatic information When a switched through state is obtained, suffixes can be dialed. That is, B side units, e.g. an automatic information service, require further MFC signals. Thus, code receivers must not be deactivated.

RCALLBAC

With an A � B connection via an operator, a hook flash can be used to bring the operator back into the call.

FIRSTACT If this value is set, the network traffic status "primary traffic" is set to the first active route, which could be the last one. Omitting this value assigns the network traffic status "primary traffic" to route number 1 even if that route is deactivated.

FEATCHCK This parameter value indicates, that the content of the SS7-ISUP IAM has to be checked against a special "protocol table". This has normally the effect, that the CgPA (A-DN) is not transmitted in the IAM generated for calls to this destination.

��TLIM and MINMAX see following pages

TIP With MODDEST it is possible to change or delete all the characteristics of a destination area.

Page 67: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

67

Destination Administration

CR DEST: DEST= [,FOVCODE=] [,MINMAX=] [,TLIM=] [,DEFEAT=];

CAN DEST: DEST= ;

DISP DEST: DEST= [,FORMAT=];

Format= ALL display of all types of DEST

STD display of standard DEST only

SORT display in alphabetic order

NOSORT display according to SW table entries

Fig. 37 Destination administration

DISPDEST:DEST=X,FORMAT=ALL;

DESTINATION NAMES AND STANDARD ROUTING PARAMETERS

TYP

DEST : MINMAX DEFEAT TLIM

--------------+-+------+---------+------------------------------

FKFT690TA 1-20 DIALTM1& RINGTM1& CLEATM1&

OFFCALL& RELTM3

HAMB410MN 1-20 DIALTM1& RINGTM1& CLEATM1&

OFFCALL& RELTM3

DSBG261MN 1-20 DIALTM1& RINGTM1& CLEATM1&

OFFCALL& RELTM3

END TEXT JOB 8084 EXEC'D

X722/CTYCPZ1V1150/P11/113 99-10-28 12:30:59

8084 OMT-00/MSC0 2882/06590

DISPDEST:DEST=X,FORMAT=ALL&SORT;

DESTINATIONS WITH CODE PROCESSING

DEST TYP NEWCODE/FOVCODE CONVCODE

------------+-+--------------------+-------------------------------+

IC.NC0049 0

END JOB 8084 EXEC'D

Fig. 38 Display of destinations

Page 68: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

68

��The parameter MINMAX is used to determine the total number of dialed digits to be collected on the A-side. This is mainly important with inter exchange signaling systems (e.g. MFCR1 or No5) which do not offer the possibility that the terminating exchange can send back an "END OF SELECTION" or "ADDRESS COMPLETE" message to inform the originating exchange that enough digits have been received to determine the B-party. With signaling systems using EOS/ACM (e.g.CCS7 ISUP) MINMAX may be used to offer a stronger timer supervision of the intervals between the dialed digits in order to avoid an unnecessary long call set up duration after the seizure of the trunk (MIN is reached). The parameter MINMAX contains two information units: The minimum number of digits and the maximum number of digits. A special interdigit timer is set in the outgoing LTG when the minimum number of digits has been dialed. If the time is over the address is recognized as complete and transmitted as a block. If the maximum number of digits has been reached the address is immediately recognized as complete. The minimum value of MINMAX must be equal or higher the DINO in the routes of this DEST. For DEST of CPT with LAC the LAC has not to be counted for defining the MINMAX. If the CdPA the includes a LAC, the MINMAX is internally increased by the number of the LAC digits.

��The parameter TLIM enables you to manipulate timers with the help of symbolic values. Every symbolic value is assigned to one of the GP timers which can be modified via the command MOD TIOUT.

Page 69: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

69

Values of

destination specific

timers

GP Timer

DISP TIOUT

Meaning

DIALTM1..3

(default:1)

TIMER7, 8, 9 Dialtime or Address Complete

Supervision Timer on A-side

OFFDIA No Dialtime supervision

RINGTM0 No Ringtime supervision

RINGTM1..7

(default:1)

TIMER19...25 supervision on the A-side of the B-

side ringing time

CLEATM1..6

(default:1)

TIMER34...39 A-side delay time between reception

of backward clearing message and

forwarding of RELEASE COMPLETE

RELCLEA Release immediately after reception

of backward clearing message

OFFEND backward clearing is not supervised

RELTM0..3

(default:3)

project specific solutions in the A-

exchange concerning the handling

(delays) of the release of a call in

forward direction after the calling party

has gone on hook

CONVTM1..7 TIMER27...33 A-side Call duration limitation

OFFCALL

(default)

No A-sideCall duration limitation

Example: Monitoring of the dialing time on the A-party side

•CPT: CODE=0893, DEST=ABC...

•DEST „ABC“: MINMAX=8-15, TLIM=DIALTM1.....

A-party dials 08931234567:

>0>8>9>3 >:time supervision by general interdigit timer

>1>2>3>4 >:time supervision by DIALTM1

>5>6>7 >:time supervision by special MINMAX timer

Fig. 39 TLIM parameter values

Page 70: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

70

3.2 Destination Areas with Repeated Digit Translation

3.2.1 Functionality

Instead of branching to a route via a destination area it is possible to jump back to the digit translator with a new or modified code.

Page 71: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

71

Digit translation

Destination area with

repeat digit translation

NEWCODE / CONVCODE

new or

modified code

Digits

Fig. 40 Principle of repeated digit translation

Page 72: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

72

Example for the application of NEWCODE

The digits of the called party address which are already evaluated in the CP (CODE of CPT) are replaced with the given NEWCODE. The remaining digits of the called party address are unchanged.

Now a repeated digit translation is carried out with the NEWCODE plus the unchanged digits.

Page 73: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

73

Police station 1

DN=445566

ORIG1=5

LAC=

089dials 911

Police station 2

DN=556677

ORIG1=10

dials 911

CR DEST: DEST = POL 1,

NEWCODE = 445566;

CR DEST: DEST = POL 2,

NEWCODE = 556677;

CR CPT: CODE = 911,

ORIG1 = 5-3,

DEST = POL 1;

CR CPT: CODE= 911,

ORIG1 = 10-3,

DEST = POL 2;

Fig. 41

Page 74: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

74

Example for the application of CONVCODE

The digits already evaluated and also the non evaluated digits can be altered.

Exception: if a LAC of the exchange is part of the dialed called party address it remains unchanged.

The following changes are possible:

1. Keep digits unchanged (X)

2. Delete digits (.)

3. Enter digits (+digit)

4. Replace digits (new digit)

Page 75: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

75

CR DEST: DEST = MODCOD,

CONVCODE = 9 9 X +0;

CR CPT: CODE = 11,

DEST = MODCOD;

CR DEST: DEST = POLN;

CR CPT: CODE = 9900,

DEST = POLN;

CR DEST: DEST = FIREN;

CR CPT: CODE = 9920,

DEST = FIREN;

110

digits

112

digits To DEST=FIREN

with CPT=9920

To DEST=POLN

with CPT=9900

Fig. 42

Page 76: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

76

3.2.2 Summary: MML Commands

Parameter NEWCODE: you can enter a new code with up to 20 digits here

Parameter CONVCODE: the parameter CONVCODE in the MML command CR DEST serves to modify the digit combination for a repeat digit translation. The parameter CONVCODE uses a special code to indicate how to modify the original code digit by digit. There are special control characters in the CONVCODE that specify whether to delete, replace or leave etc. the original digit at the respective digit position or not.

CONVCODE control characters and their meaning

X the original digit remains at the respective position

. the original digit is deleted

+ <digits> the digits after the „+“ sign are inserted at the respective position

<digits> the original digits are replaced at the respective position(s)

Page 77: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

77

Destination Administration

CR DEST: DEST= {[,NEWCODE=] | [CONVCODE=]};

CAN DEST: DEST= ;

DISP DEST: DEST= [,FORMAT=];

FORMAT= ALL All types of destinations are displayed

STD Only standard destinations are displayed

SORT Destinations are displayed in alphabetical order

NOSORT Destinations are displayed according to their table entries

NEWCODE Destinations with repeat digit translation are displayed

Fig.43 Destination administration

CONVCODE control characters and their meaning

X the original digit remains at the resp. position

. the original digit is deleted

+ <digits> the digits after the „+“ sign are inserted at theresp. position

<digits> the original digits are replaced at the resp.position(s)

Fig. 44 CONVCODE syntax

TIP It is also possible to use the repeated digit translation for changing the ORIG1 (NEWORIG) or the carrier access code (NEWCAC).

Page 78: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

78

3.3 Destination Areas with Optimized Dynamic Routing (ODR)

3.3.1 Functionality

1. Fixed Alternative Routing As already described in the chapter "destinations with fixed alternative routing" the sequencing of the routes is only possible with a predetermined overflow sequence. The position in the overflow sequence was specified by the parameter ROUTE in the MML command CR ROUTE (further description in the chapter on administration of routes). This method is known as "fixed alternative routing" (FAR) and is preferably used in hierarchical networks, since their network structure defines for the routes a different grade of directness.

2. Optimized Dynamic Routing (ODR) ODR makes both a load-dependent dynamic route selection with the possibility of rerouting and an avoidance of circular routing in intermeshed networks possible. The application of this method requires that the different alternative routes to a destination are not subject to any equipping priorities because they all have the same grade of directness. Thus the application is located in intermeshed networks also called "NON HIERARCHICAL NETWORK (NHN)".

3. Both methods: FAR and ODR can occur (mixed) upon the accessing of a destination.

4. ODR should not be combined with a trunk group cluster, since the overflow within the trunk group cluster is blocked by ODR.

Page 79: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

79

hierarchical networkwith "fixed alternative

routing" (FAR)

Route 1

Route

2Route 3

Node A Node B

SIEMENS SIEMENS

SIEMENS SIEMENS

SIEMENS SIEMENS

SIEMENS SIEMENSSIEMENS SIEMENS

Fig. 45 FAR routing

Route 1(FAR)

Node BNode A

Meshed network

NHN with "fixed

alternative routing"

(FAR) and

"optimized dynamic

routing" (ODR)

dynam

ic ro

ute ODR

dynamic route ODR

SIEMENS SIEMENS

SIEMENS SIEMENSSIEMENS SIEMENS

SIEMENS SIEMENS

Fig. 46 ODR routing

Page 80: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

80

Avoidance of circular routing

In hierarchical networks circular routing can be avoided as it has been up until now by spotting traffic on the rise and decline in the network hierarchy with the help of the ORIG1 parameter.

Until now this has presented some difficulties in intermeshed networks. In this case the ODR procedure offers a new possibility but it also places certain demands on an intermeshed network:

1. The intermeshing of all nodes:

All nodes of the network need to have a direct connection to all other nodes of the network.

All nodes can be reached via n-2 (n= number of nodes in the network) equivalent alternative routes.

2. Transit nodes

Every alternative route needs to run via exactly one transit node.

The selection of the direct route takes place via FAR. The selection of equivalent alternative routes takes place via ODR. In order to avoid circular routing ODR may only take place once during call set up in the intermeshed network level. ODR always takes place in the originating nodes of the intermeshed or non-hierarchical network. All incoming trunk groups from other nodes of the same network level will be marked (CR TGRP:GCOS=NHNINC) to indicate that ODR has taken place already. Because of this marking the system automatically prevents another ODR and accesses the next node (end node within the non-hierarchical network) via the direct route (with FAR) or leaves the non-hierarchical network (via FAR).

Page 81: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

81

node A

node B

FAR to

BFAR to B

FA

R to B

not inter

meshed

lower or

higher

network

level

e.g. local

area

networks

inter

meshed

network

level

(NHN)

TGRP from local area network or other operator

CRTGRP:GCOS=NHNINC,...;

ODR allowed

TGRP from other ex.

of the NHN

CRTGRP:GCOS=NHNINC,...;

ODR forbidden

OD

R to

BO

DR

to B O

DR

to B

OD

R to B

SIEMENS SIEMENS

SIEMENS SIEMENS

SIEMENS SIEMENS

SIEMENS SIEMENS

node Cnode D

ODR to B

ODR to B

Fig. 47 ODR with prevention of circular routing

Page 82: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

82

3.3.2 Implementation

Accessing the FAR and ODR routes

Routes can be assigned to a destination area either according to the FAR or the ODR method. The allocation of FAR routes takes place in the same manner as in earlier versions.

In order to assign routes according to the ODR procedure, only one ODR list per destination area may be created, which for its part contains up to 64 equivalent routes (trunk groups to a destination area). These routes are now dynamically (load-dependent) active.

It must be ensured that no further route is selected in the FAR list after unsuccessful routing in the ODR list. This does not apply when the ODR list is administratively blocked and therefore skipped. As a rule, the FAR route(s) should be set up in the overflow sequence as the first route(s) and the ODR list as an alternative route. As already mentioned, further routes in the FAR list could follow on the ODR list, which are then however only accessed, if the ODR list is administratively blocked.

The number of routes within the FAR list, for which call attempts are made before the ODR list is accessed, is established while setting up the destination area.

Page 83: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

83

node A

node Dother

network

meshed

networkODR

forbidden

ODR

allowedO

DR

route

FAR route 1

node B

node E

OD

R ro

ute

SIEMENS SIEMENS

SIEMENS SIEMENS

SIEMENS SIEMENS

SIEMENS SIEMENS

SIEMENS SIEMENS

node

C

Fig. 48

further routes

(not shown)

Dest =

NODE B

LINK= 1

further routes

TGNO=CE

TGNO=CD

TGNO=CB

Routes

Dest

route m

further routes

(not shown)

route 2

route 1

ODR List

FAR list

route 1

route n

call release

ODR allowed

ODR forbidden

n = max 16

m= max 64 overall

max 8 routing

attempts for one

call set up

Admin blocked

FAR and ODR list in Node C

Fig. 49 ODR principle

Page 84: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

84

Route selection in the ODR list

Upon the first call setup the route selection begins ("first choice") in the ODR list with the path set up as e.g. route 1. This action continues for a total of 6 (project specific but changeable by means of a patch) attempted call setups; the next 6 new call attempts begin with route 2, the next 6 with route 3, etc. After the last route in the ODR list is used as "first choice" the process starts again with route 1.

If this first choice route has "all trunk busy" an attempt will be made to occupy the next route (overflow) that is not blocked (administratively or dynamically) and that has a higher route number (ROUTE=).

The number of routing attempts in the ODR list for one call can be restricted administratively (CR/MOD ODR: MAXATT=1..8). If none of the attempts was successful, a release follows.

Page 85: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

85

route n

route n-1

route 2

route 1ODR list

route n

route 3

route 2

route 1

route n

route 3

route 2

route 1

ODR list

route n

route 3

route 2

route 1

ODR list

very first 6

call attempts

very second 6

call attempts

cyclic overflow

cyclic first choice

First choice

CR/MODODR:

MAXATT =

(max.seizure

attempts)

First choice

First choice

First choice

First choice

last 6 call attempts

current 6 call attempts

Fig. 50 Route seizure attempts in the ODR list

Page 86: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

86

Load-dependent transient blockage of the routes in the ODR list

1. The load-dependent distribution of traffic among the various routes of an ODR list is achieved by temporary blockage of the routes. There are two different blockage levels: A and B. These different levels are attained by means of different events and are also cleared due to different events. The first call attempt of a maximum of 6 on one ODR route is unsuccessful because of "all trunk busy" in its own or the next node: ==> The route goes into blockage level A. The first call attempt on one ODR route was successful, but another (2..6) is unsuccessful because of "all trunk busy" in the own or the next node: ==> The route goes into blockage level B.

2. Blockage level B is cleared when all routes of the ODR list blocked.

3. Blockage level A is cleared after blockage level B is cleared, but fewer routes than the maximum number of route seizure attempts per call setup are available (CR/MOD ODR: MAXATT=)

Page 87: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

87

ODR list

route n

blockage = A

ODR list

route m

blockage = B

all routes blocked

route n

blockage = A or B

all routes blocked

route n +3

blockage = B

route n + 2

blockage = B

route n + 1

blockage A

route n

blockage = B

TGRP

all trunk busy in

own or next node

first call attempt

for this route

overflow

Blocking

Deblocking

TGRP

all trunk busy in

own or next node

TGRP

all trunk busy in

own or next node

if number of

unblocked routes

second to sixth

call attempt

call attempt

maximum

route search

attempts

deblocking of routes

with blockage A

Deblocking of all

routes with

blockage B and

continue overflow

for current call

attempt

overflow

Fig. 51 Transient blocking and unblocking

Page 88: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

88

3.3.3 MML Commands

1. The command CR ODR provides a new ODR list. It is identified with the help of the ODR parameter. You can enter the parameter MAXATT to determine the maximum attempts per call in this list when setting it up.

2. The command CAN ODR deletes an ODR list. The prerequisite for this is that the list contains no routes anymore and is not linked to any destination area anymore.

3. A newly set up ODR list has to be activated with ACT ODR. This command can also be used for reactivating an ODR list deactivated with DACT ODR or for a compulsory resetting of the temporary bars in the list.

4. The command DISP ODR is used to log the ODR list data.

5. MOD ODR modifies the maximum number of routing attempts per call.

6. CR DEST is used to assign an ODR list which has been allocated routes by means of CR ROUTE (see Administration of routes) to a destination area. The parameter LINK specifies the position in the hunting sequence of the FAR list according to which branching into the ODR list is done.

TIP

1. The command ACT/DACT ODR without parameter ODR list is used as a general activation / deactivation of the ODR feature.

2. With the command MOD ODR the rerouting function can be switched on and off (explained in the ROUTE Chapter)

Page 89: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

89

ODR List Administration

Creation of a new ODR list

CR ODR: ODR= [,MAXATT=];

Cancelation of an ODR list

CAN ODR : ODR= ;

Activation of a newly created or a deactivated ODR list

ACT ODR : ODR= ;

Deactivation of ODR or an ODR list

DACT ODR : ODR= ;

Display of the ODR data

DISP ODR: ODR= ;

Modification of the maximum attempts

MOD ODR: ODR= ,MAXATT=;

Fig. 52 MML commands for ODR administration

Destination Administration

CR DEST: DEST= , ODR= , LINK= ;

CAN DEST: DEST= ;

DISP DEST: DEST= [,FORMAT=];

FORMAT= ALL All types of destinations are displayed

STD Only standard destinations are displayed

SORT Destinations are displayed in alphabeticalorder

NOSORT Destinations are displayed according totheir table entries

LINK A linked ODR list and the link position isdisplayed

Fig. 53 MML commands for DEST with ODR administration

Page 90: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

90

Example

In the example shown an ODR list is set up with the name ODR9. If the parameter MAXATT is not set, the default value 4 will be entered.

The ODR list is linked with the route: TGNO U089.

A destination area FKFT699TMM is set up and the ODR list ODR9 linked in after the first FAR route.

The TGNO U039 is set up as ROUTE1 in the FAR list.

Page 91: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

91

<CR ODR:ODR=ODR9;

MSC5/D2MMPK1V16180024/003 98-02-20 12:34:13

1365 OMT-00/SIEMENS0 2878/00007

CRODR:ODR=ODR9; EXEC'D

END JOB 1365

1377

<DISP ODR:ODR=X;

MSC5/D2MMPK1V16180024/003 98-02-20 12:34:21

1377 OMT-00/SIEMENS0 2882/08885

DISPODR:ODR=X;

ODR GLOBAL : ACT REROUTING : YES

ODR MAXATT DACT

--------------+-------+----

ODR9 4 *

END JOB 1377 EXEC'D

1411

<CR ROUTE:ODR=ODR9,TGNO=U089,ROUTE=1;

MSC5/D2MMPK1V16180024/003 98-02-20 12:36:11

1411 OMT-00/SIEMENS0 2878/00007

CRROUTE:ODR=ODR9,TGNO=U089,ROUTE=1; EXEC'D

END JOB 1411

1611

<CR DEST:DEST=FKFT699TMM,ODR=ODR9,LINK=1;

MSC5/D2MMPK1V16180024/003 98-02-20 12:46:57

1611 OMT-00/SIEMENS0 2878/00007

CRDEST:DEST=FKFT699TMM,ODR=ODR9,LINK=1; EXEC'D

END JOB 1611

1650

<CR ROUTE:DEST=FKFT699TMM,TGNO=U039,ROUTE=1;

MSC5/D2MMPK1V16180024/003 98-02-20 12:49:00

1650 OMT-00/SIEMENS0 2878/00007

CRROUTE:DEST=FKFT699TMM,TGNO=U039,ROUTE=1; EXEC'D

END JOB 1650

Fig. 54 Example of ODR administration

Page 92: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

92

Example cont.

The set up destination is logged without FORMAT parameter and amongst other things the link to the ODR list is logged.

The ODR list ODR9 is activated.

Remark: Creating the corresponding code points and trunk groups was not demonstrated in the example.

Page 93: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

93

1662

<DISP DEST:DEST=FKFT699TMM;

MSC5/D2MMPK1V16180024/003 98-02-20 12:49:32

1662 OMT-00/SIEMENS0 2882/06379

DISPDEST:DEST=FKFT699TMM;

DESTINATION NAMES AND STANDARD ROUTING PARAMETERS

TYP

DEST : MINMAX DEFEAT TLIM

--------------+-+------+---------+------------------------------

FKFT699TMM 1-20 DIALTM1& RINGTM1& CLEATM1&

OFFCALL& RELTM3

END TEXT JOB 1662 EXEC'D

MSC5/D2MMPK1V16180024/003 98-02-20 12:49:33

1662 OMT-00/SIEMENS0 2882/08886

DISPDEST:DEST=FKFT699TMM;

DESTINATIONS WITH OPTIMIZED DYNAMIC ROUTING LINKAGE

DEST ODR LINK

--------------+--------------+----

FKFT699TMM ODR9 1

END JOB 1662 EXEC'D

1663

<ACT ODR:ODR=ODR9;

MSC5/D2MMPK1V16180024/003 98-02-20 12:50:17

1663 OMT-00/SIEMENS0 2878/00007

ACTODR:ODR=ODR9; EXEC'D

END JOB 1663

Fig. 55 Example of ODR administration

Page 94: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

94

Page 95: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

95

4 Routes

Page 96: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

96

4.1 Standard Routing

4.1.1 Functionality

A standard route links a destination area or an ODR list to a trunk group. In other words, it is a trunk group leading to a particular destination area.

The hunting sequence is defined when allocating a route to a destination or an ODR list. The hunting sequence is fixed for the destination area. The rules applying to the ODR are described in the chapter 'Administration of destination areas'.

Page 97: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

97

Destination area

Routes

1 2 16

Route

Route

Route

ODR List

Routes

1 2 64

Route

Route

Route

TGRP

TGRP

TGRP

TGRP

TGRP

TGRP

Fig. 56 Embedding routes into the routing database

Page 98: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

98

4.1.2 MML Commands

A route is set up, deleted and logged with the commands CR ROUTE, CAN ROUTE and DISP ROUTE. Setting up is always performed in ascending hunting sequence and deleting in descending hunting sequence. Apart from this routes can be inserted between existing routes or taken out of these by means of INS ROUTE and TAKO ROUTE.

��The parameters DEST and TGNO create a linkage between the destination area and the trunk group. If a route is assigned to an ODR list instead of to a destination, enter ODR instead of DEST.

��The ROUTE parameter consists of 3 information units. The first unit indicates the position in the sequence. The second unit {Y|N} indicates whether the last trunk of the accessed trunk group can be seized for this route by normal subscribers. In case of "N" the last trunk can only be seized by prioritized subscribers. The third information unit indicates a rerouting group number. This is described separately in the section 'Rerouting'.

��The parameter DICON indicates how to modify the CdPA in forward direction (explained later).

��The parameter LNDES offers information on the application of the CLEARBACK signal and the handling of meter pulses (METOTR) in case of zoning in higher exchange. Furthermore all the first FAR route in a NHN is marked with LNDES=PRIM to allow a more detailed traffic measurement on trunk groups.

��The parameter TRACA offers information on the type of the call. This is where among other things you specify whether it is an emergency call or not (explained later).

��With the help of the parameter ZDIG you can enter a language digit for the operator-operator calls in order to ensure a connection with an operator of the same language in the destination country.

��The parameter DINO indicates at what point in time outward seizure is executed and how many digits are to be sent in the CCS7 initial address message IAM. If you want to send out the IAM as soon as possible (after the digit translation has found the code point) you have to enter DINO=OVERLAP. The feature DINO=ENBLOC (sending of the complete CdPA with one messages) can only be used together with EOS=PROG. The DINO value must not exceed the minimum value of MINMAX.

��The parameter EOS (end of selection) determines whether the exchange will receive an ADDRESS COMPLETE SIGNAL from the terminating exchange when the B-party is there determined (EOS=SIGN) or has to determine the end of dialing by the dial time supervision started in the MINMAX range (EOS=PROG). With reaching EOS the originating EWSD will deactivate the code DTMF receiver on the A-subscriber side, through-connect the speech path in the LTG group switch and activated the ringing time supervision.

Page 99: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

99

��The parameter SSDI (start sending digits) is used to influence after which digit of the processed CdPA the outpulsing of the digits should start. By this you can avoid that e.g. the first three digits of the CdPA are signaled to the next exchange because they are not needed anymore. In case of CCS7 ISUP signaling the parameter SSDI has normally no function.

Route Administration

CR ROUTE: {DEST= | ODR=}, ROUTE=, TGNO=

[,DINO=] [,TRACA=] [,LNDES=] [,DICON=]

[,SSDI=] [,EOS=] [,ZDIG=];

CAN ROUTE: {DEST= | ODR=}, ROUTE=, TGNO= ;

DISP ROUTE: {DEST= | ODR=}, ROUTE=, TGNO= [,FORMAT=];

INS ROUTE: {DEST= | ODR=}, ROUTE=, TGNO= [,DINO=]

[,TRACA=] [,LNDES=] [,DICON=] [,SSDI=]

[,EOS=] [,ZDIG=];

TAKO ROUTE: {DEST= | ODR=}, ROUTE=, TGNO= ;

Fig. 57 MML commands for routing administration

TIP

��The last route of a destination can only be cancelled if there is no more CPT existing for this DEST.

��The command MOD ROUTE may be used to change the characteristics (e.g. DINO, DICON…) of a ROUTE.

Page 100: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

100

TIP

1. The parameter STAT (CR ROUTE) is only used if an exchange still works with the old concept of inter-exchange revenue account IARA instead of the V11/V12 concept of IACHASTA.

2. Explanation of the parameter values for FORMAT (DISP ROUTE):

(NO)SORT

(not)sorted alphabetically

ALL active and blocked routes

ACT active routes

DACT blocked routes

COMB FAR and ODR routes

M1ST first part of the mask (TGNO, DEST, ROUTE, DINO, SSDI,EOS,LNDES,TRACA,DACT)

M2ND second part of the mask (TGNO,DEST,ROUTE,STAT,ZDIG,DICON)

M3RD third part of the mask (TGNO,DEST,ROUTE,DACT)

MALL M1ST & M2ND & M3RD

Page 101: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

101

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DISPROUTE:DEST=X,FORMAT=ALL&SORT;

DACT

TGNO DEST ROUTE DINO SSDI EOS LNDES TRACA :

----------+------------+------+----------+----+----+---------+-------+--

O0INT 0INT 1-Y D2 4 SIGN METOTR & NAT

PRIM

O1INT 1INT 1-Y D2 4 SIGN METOTR & NAT

PRIM

O0INT ODR 1-Y OVERLAP 1 SIGN CLEARBA & NAT

PRIM

END TEXT JOB 5823 EXEC'D

DISPROUTE:DEST=X,FORMAT=ALL&SORT;

ZDIG DACT

TGNO DEST ROUTE STAT : DICON :

----------+------------+------+----+--+-------------------------------+-

O0INT 0INT 1-Y 0 0

O1INT 1INT 1-Y 0 0

O0INT ODR 1-Y 0 0

END JOB 5823 EXEC'D

Fig. 58 Display of routing data

Page 102: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

102

Parameter DICON

The DICON parameter in the MML command CR ROUTE serves to modify the called party address CdPA for the digits to be transmitted in forward direction. With the help of a special code the parameter DICON indicates how the original code is to be modified digit for digit. The control characters indicate whether the original digits in the respective positions are to be deleted, replaced or retained etc.

DICON control characters and their meaning

X the original digit remains at the respective position

. the original digit is deleted

+<digits> the digits after the "+" sign are inserted at the respective position

<digits> the original digits are replaced at the respective position(s)

TIP

��DICON is a route specific modification of the CdPA signaled to the next exchange and has in opposite to NEWCODE and CONVCODE no influence to the digit translation in the own exchange.

��DICON has no effect to the dialed LAC of a CdPA, if the according CPT is created with parameter CODE and LAC

Page 103: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

103

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DICON control characters and their meaning

X the original digit remains at the resp. position

. the original digit is deleted

+ <digits> the digits after the "+" sign are inserted at theresp. position

<digits> the original digits are replaced at the resp.position(s)

Fig. 59 DICON syntax

Page 104: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

104

Parameter TRACA

The route specific traffic category serves to control call processing sequences in the specific or neighboring exchange.

The procedure is carried out with the TRACA parameter (traffic category). The various traffic categories used for routes with CCS7 trunk are described in brief as follows:

��EMCAL - Emergency call States that the connection leads to an emergency call destination: That is, the connection cannot be released from the A-side. If no trunk of the route is free, a seizure attempt is repeated until a free trunk becomes available ("pumping" for 30 sec with a connection attempt every 2 sec). The second information unit of the parameter ROUTE (seizure of the last trunk) of all other routes using this trunk group is to be set to NO.

��RADCALO - Rate adapted calls only

��REGICA - Regional call Generates CAMA call charge data within a local network when there is traffic over a regional exchange. The area code is set in front of the B-party number.

��DIRECT - direct call Outgoing international traffic from the IN only goes to the destination country via the direct route, and not via transit countries. This request is signaled in a CCS7 ISUP national parameter (NP:SSP) and is therefore country specific.

��OPCAL - Call to operator

Specifies that in the case of a public payphone � operator call, an audible coin validation tone is inserted after the off-hook signal. That is, the A-side is informed that the operator knows that the calling party is using a public payphone.

��NAT - National call Represents a national call and is , in contrast to TERM, SUB and TRANS, the default value.

��SUB - Subscriber Used for some CCS 7 user parts to transmit the CdPA without LAC since the next exchange is the end exchange.

��Term - Terminating call international Specifies that the route leads to an international exchange of the destination country. In case of CCS7 ISUP only on routes with TRACA=TERM the parameter SSDI can be used. In this way you can suppress the country code in the CdPA sent to the terminating international exchange.

��TRANS - Transit call international Specifies that the route leads to an international exchange used as an international transit exchange.

Page 105: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

105

Parameter ZDIG (Language Digit)

The language digit (Z-digit) is used to access operator positions with specific language characteristics. The language digit entered with the parameter is only transmitted if a Z-digit has not already been received on the incoming side and if the

A-side category is an operator. A-side category means that the A-side operator is in the exchange, the category has been signaled, or the category is assigned to the incoming trunk (GCOS=OPOS).

Country Code: 33PFXINAT= 00

CR ROUTE:DEST=GER,

ROUTE=1,TRACA=TRANS,TGNO=.....

Localarea

code089

terminating

localexchange

originating

international

gateway

LAC = 089

DN = 722...

IAM

called party

NA = international number

digits: 498972241429

Country Code: 49

Code Point 089to

destnation MUNICH

Country Code: 55PFXINAT: 00

CR ROUTE:DEST=GER,ROUTE=1,

TRACA=TERM,

SSDI=5TGNO=.....

transit

international

gateway

CdPA=00498972241429

national

network

IAM

called party

NA = national number

digits: 8972241429

terminating

international

gateway

IAM

called party

NA = national number

digits: 8972241429

Fig. 60 Parameter TRACA=TREM

Page 106: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

106

4.2 Changing the Hunting Sequence

As already mentioned, routes can only be set up in ascending order and deleted in descending order. Use the command INS ROUTE or TAKO ROUTE to insert or take routes out of existing ones.

For relocations within the hunting sequence use the command MOD ROUTE:DEST=.., TGNO=..., ROUTE=<new position>;

Page 107: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

107

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DEST

1 TGNO=ABC

2 TGNO=EFG

3 TGNO=IJK

4 TGNO=LMN

INS ROUTE:

DEST= ,

TGNO=XYZ,

ROUTE=3;

DEST

1 TGNO=ABC

2 TGNO=EFG

4 TGNO=IJK

5 TGNO=LMN

3 TGNO=XYZ

DEST

1 TGNO=ABC

2 TGNO=XYZ

3 TGNO=IJK

4 TGNO=LMN

TAKO ROUTE:

DEST= ,

TGNO=EFG,

ROUTE=2;

DEST

1 TGNO=ABC

2 TGNO=EFG

3 TGNO=IJK

4 TGNO=LMN

MOD ROUTE:

DEST= ,

TGNO=ABC,

ROUTE=3;

DEST

1 TGNO=EFG

2 TGNO=IJK

4 TGNO=LMN

3 TGNO=ABC

Fig. 61 Modification of route hunting

Page 108: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

108

4.3 Rerouting

4.3.1 Rerouting for FAR Routing

If a desired connection is put through in the own switching system but not through connected in another switching system e.g. because of "all trunk busy", this is signaled backwards (e.g. RELEASE with CAUSE "No circuit/channel available"). If rerouting is activated in the switching system the search for an available trunk group is continued in the rerouting list.

Of course it does not make any sense to try again via the same transit switches as there will probably be an "all trunk busy" case again. Therefore, routes that lead via the same transit switching systems can be joined up to form a group. If the rerouting case now occurs, the call is branched to a route that belongs to a different rerouting group than the previous one.

Rerouting is executed only once per call attempt in a switching system.

Page 109: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

109

SIEMENS SIEMENS

SIEMENS SIEMENS

SIEMENS SIEMENS

SIEMENS SIEMENS

Route 1

Rerouting Group 1Route 2

Rerouting Group 1

Route 3

Rerouting

Group 2

all trunk

busy

DEST =

.............

Route Rer.group

1 1

2 1

3 2

...... .......

Source

Destination

SIEMENS SIEMENS

Transit Transit Transit

SIEMENS SIEMENS

Transit

Rerouting Group A dm inistration

CR ROUTE: DEST=.., TGNO=...,

ROUTE=<route no>-<seize last trunk>-<rerouting group>;

Fig. 62 Rerouting for FAR

Page 110: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

110

4.3.2 Rerouting for ODR Routing

If no idle trunk is found within the next network node after a successful outgoing call in the own node, it will be signaled back and an attempt will be made to seize the next route (prerequisite: MOD ODR:REROUTE=YES;).

There are no rerouting groups for ODR rerouting as there are for FAR rerouting, since an intermeshed network with only one transit node is required in this case. Rerouting is carried out only once per through connection. This limitation is equally valid for FAR and ODR.

Another limitation is that no rerouting is carried out for ODR if the maximum number of call attempts has already been reached.

Page 111: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

111

ODR R

oute

n +

1

Node A

ODR R

oute

n

FAR Route 1

w/o REROUTING

e.g. all trunk busyNode B

all trunk busy

IAM

MODODR:

REROUTE = YES,...;

IAM

REL

SIEMENS SIEMENS

SIEMENS SIEMENS

SIEMENS SIEMENS

SIEMENS SIEMENS

Fig. 63 Rerouting for ODR

Page 112: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

112

4.4 Routes Formed by Trunk Group Clusters

4.4.1 Functionality

General structure

It is possible to combine up to sixteen outgoing or bothway trunk groups in one trunk group cluster in order to distribute the offered seizures under certain aspects.

Contrary to the feature "Destination areas with conditional alternative routing" the distribution is not performed for the entire destination area but is route specific.

1. A trunk group cluster can be used to increase the number of trunk groups per destination.

2. A trunk group cluster can be used to specify the seizure distribution among the different trunk groups.

TIP Trunk group clusters are normally only used in the FAR list.

Page 113: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

113

Destination

Area

Route 1

Route 2

Route 3

Route 16

Cluster

Trunkgroup 1

Trunkgroup 16

Trunkgroup

Cluster

Trunkgroup 1

Trunkgroup 16

Trunkgroup

Fig. 64 Structure of trunk group cluster

Page 114: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

114

First Choice specification

It is possible to specify the First Choice algorithm within a trunk group cluster. First Choice is understood to be the trunk group that is checked first for an available trunk for the respective seizure attempt. If the trunk group has no available trunk the over-flow begins.

In contrast to the standard routing the First Choice is changeable for the trunk group cluster, i.e. in a cluster a different trunk group can be First Choice for each call. For standard routing the first choice is always route 1 unless it is barred.

The following procedures are available for the First Choice specification:

1. Fixed First Choice sequence (Fixed Sequence) As with the standard routing the First Choice is always the first trunk group, but within the cluster in this case. Advantage: Expansion of the trunk groups per destination.

2. Circular First Choice (Equal Distribution) For the first seizure attempt the First Choice begins with the first trunk group, for the second seizure attempt with the second trunk group etc. After the last trunk group the call is redirected to the first trunk group.

3. Individual First Choice (Variable Distribution) The First Choice is distributed among trunk groups on the basis of administered quotas.

Page 115: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

115

Trunk

Group

Cluster

Trunkgroup 1

Trunkgroup 2

Trunkgroup 3

Trunkgroup n

100%

just overflow

just overflow

just overflow

Fixed Sequence

Trunk

Group

Cluster

Trunkgroup 1

Trunkgroup 2

Trunkgroup 3

Trunkgroup n

1. call

2. call

3. call

n. call

Equal Distribution

Trunk

Group

Cluster

Trunkgroup 1

Trunkgroup 2

Trunkgroup 3

Trunkgroup n

x%

y%

z%

a%

Variable Distribution

Fig. 65 First choice algorithm

Page 116: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

116

Individual overflow specification

In the default case the overflow sequence is circular. This means that in the case of "all trunk busy" the call flows over to the next trunk group. If you wish, you can obtain an individual overflow sequence for each trunk group of a cluster, if it happens to be the First Choice, within the cluster.

Page 117: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

117

Trunk

Group

Cluster

Trunkgroup 1

Trunkgroup 2

Trunkgroup 3

Trunkgroup n

1. Choice

2. overflow

1. overflow

3. overflow

Trunk

Group

Cluster

Trunkgroup 1

Trunkgroup 2

Trunkgroup 3

Trunkgroup n

1. overflow

1. Choice

3. overflow

2. overflow

Trunk

Group

Cluster

Trunkgroup 1

Trunkgroup 2

Trunkgroup 3

Trunkgroup n

1. overflow

3. overflow

2. overflow

1. Choice

Fig. 66 Example of first choice individual overflow

Page 118: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

118

4.4.2 MML Commands

A trunk group cluster and its name is created with the help of the MML command CR TGCLU.

1. The FCQSAL parameter indicates which First Choice quota algorithm is to be valid: FISEQ fixed sequence EQDI equal distribution VARDI variable distribution

2. Under TGFCQ you have to enter the max. 16 TGNO belonging to this Cluster. In case of FCQSAL=VARDI you have to define under TGFCQ for each TGRP also the first choice quota in percent. Example:TGFCQ=TGNOA-60&TGNOB-30&TGNOC-10

3. The parameter ROUSAL can have the values STD (standard) or PB (proportional bidding). If PB is indicated the trunk groups used in the cluster must not be assigned to any other cluster with PB anymore.

4. The overflow sequence can be modified trunk group specifically by means of the MML command MOD TGCLU. The MML command needs to be entered for each first choice trunk group.

5. A trunk group cluster is assigned to a destination area with CR ROUTE. To do so set the second information unit in the parameter TGNO to "T" to distinguish the cluster from simple trunk groups.

Page 119: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

119

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trunk Group Cluster Administration

CR TGCLU: TGCLU= [,ROUSAL=] [,FCQSAL=] ,TGFCQ=

MOD TGCLU: TGCLU= , TGNO= ,OVSEQ=<overflow tgno – overflow list postion> &...;

CR ROUTE: DEST= ,ROUTE= ,TGNO=<tgclu name>-T,...;

Fig. 67 MML command

Page 120: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

120

Page 121: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

121

5 Trunk Groups

Page 122: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

122

5.1 Functionality

A trunk group is an administrative collection of several PCM time slots that are connected to an adjacent node. These are called trunks. The trunks can be used as traffic or as CCS7 signaling channels.

This joint administration allows a simpler administration by allocating common properties to all trunks belonging to this trunk group. This of course implies the allocation of all trunks belonging to this group to a route (see CR ROUTE).

Direction of the call setup

When creating a trunk group, you can specify in which direction the call setup may be carried out via this trunk group:

��Call setup from the node in question in the direction of a neighboring node: "outgoing trunk group"

��Call setup from the adjacent node in the direction of the node in question: "incoming trunk group"

��Call setup to and from the neighboring nodes: "double or bothway trunk groups"

TIP The usage of trunks as CCS7 signaling channels (signaling links) is not discussed in this chapter.

Page 123: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

123

Trunk group

cluster

Trunk group

(outgoing or

bothway)

trunk list

Trunk 1 Trunk n

Trunk group

(incoming)

trunk list

No routing

Trunk 1 Trunk n

31...3210

PCM to adjacent switch PCM to adjacent switch

ROUTEDestination

or ODR list

Route

31...3210

Fig. 68 Trunk group structure

Page 124: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

124

5.2 MML Commands

A trunk group is set up, deleted, modified and displayed with the MML commands CR TGRP, CAN TGRP, MOD TGRP and DISP TGRP.

��A trunk group is identified with the parameter TGNO trunk group number. In some countries additionally an up to 12 character long name TGNA and / or an up to 4 digit long name TGN2 (may be written into the AMA record instead of TGNO) is used.

��The parameter OPMODE specifies whether the trunk group is operated in in-coming direction, in outgoing direction or bothway.

��The parameter GCOS offers important information on zoning, trunk seizure mechanisms, signaling, line priority etc. A selection of parameter values is discussed below.

��The parameters ORIG1, ORIG2 and ORIDC imprint a trunk group with an origin that can be evaluated in the digit translation, zone translation or in the so called code block point translation.

��The parameter PREFIX is used to define a digit string which has to be set in front of the CdPA received for a call set up coming in on this incoming / bothway trunk group.

��The parameter BLK enables you to enter an administrative or maintenance blocking.

��The commands ENTR and CAN TGDAT serve to change the BLK (administrative blockings only) and the GCOS parameter. The remaining parameters are modified with MOD TGRP.

��The MML command DISP TGRP displays the trunk group data. The parameter SORT enables you to sort according to TGNO or OPMODE. The parameter FORMAT specifies e.g. whether a full or brief information is to be displayed.

The command ENTR/CAN TMBLK is used to enter or remove maintenance blockings.

TIP As already discussed the GCOS=NHNINC is used for all incoming / bothway trunk groups between exchanges of a non hierarchical network NHN with ODR. Additionally the GCOS=NHNOUT is assigned to outgoing / bothway trunk groups in this case. Together with the route parameter LNDES=PRIM it enables the traffic measurement REC TGRP to distinguish for each call whether the TRGP is used as a FAR or ODR route inside the NHN. In case of using the TRGP as an ODR route it is further possible to distinguish between usage of the TGRP as first or second section of a call set up inside the NHN.

Page 125: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

125

Trunk Group Administration

Creation of a trunk group

CR TGRP : TGNO= ,OPMODE= ,GCOS= [,PREFIX=] [,ORIG1=] [,ORIG2=] [ORIGDC=,] [,BLK=] ....;

Cancelation of a trunk group

CAN TGRP : TGNO= ;

Modification of a trunk group

MOD TGRP : TGNO= <,NTGNO= , NPREFIX= ,PREFIX= ,NORIG1= ,ORIG1= ,NORIG2= ,ORIG2= ,.....>;

Modification of GCOS and blockings

ENTR TGDAT : TGNO= <,GCOS= ,BLK=> :

CAN TGDAT : TGNO= <,GCOS= ,BLK=> :

Display of a trunk group

DISP TGRP : TGNO= [,OPMODE=] [,GCOS=] [,PREFIX=] [,ORIG1=] [,ORIG2=] [,BLK=] [,SORT=] [,FORMAT=] ;

Fig. 69 MML commands trunk group administration

TIP Beside the parameter TGNO two further additional trunk group identifications can be entered (country specific use):

��TGNA additional up to 12 characters long name

��TGN2 additional four digit long identification, in some countries entered into AMA records instead of the TGNO

Page 126: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

126

In the command DISPTGRP you can influence the output by the parameters SORT and FORMAT:

SORT=OPMODE (default) sorted according to operating mode

SORT=TGNO alphabetic sorting

FORMAT=ALL (default) all data

FORMAT=SHORT only TGNO and OPMODE

FORMAT=COUNT only total number of TGRP and number of TGRP fulfilling the entered criteria (e.g. GCOS=CCS7IUP)

FORMAT=BLOCKED number of created trunks and number of blocked trunks

XITE/AD366L8003E/NCGCBK1V1530/T46/000 02-03-20 08:20:13

8454 NetM X25TH4N2 2871/06349

DISPTGRP:TGNO=X;

TGNO = S0CCS0 OPMODE = BW MASKNO:06349

GCOS = JSUBORD &NOZON &C7GLARE &CCS7IUP &PEVENGRP MASKNO:06348

&USVERS0

SIGVAR = VAR0 MASKNO:08467

TGNO = S1CCS0 OPMODE = BW MASKNO:06349

GCOS = JSUBORD &NOZON &C7GLARE &CCS7IUP &PODDGRP MASKNO:06348

&USVERS0

SIGVAR = VAR0 MASKNO:08467

TGNO = S0SPC0 OPMODE = BW MASKNO:06349

GCOS = JSUBORD &NOZON &C7GLARE &LPRIO1 &CCS7IUP MASKNO:06348

&PEVENGRP &DARALLOW &USVERS1

SIGVAR = VAR0 MASKNO:08467

TGNO = S1SPC0 OPMODE = BW MASKNO:06349

GCOS = JSUBORD &NOZON &C7GLARE &LPRIO1 &CCS7IUP MASKNO:06348

&PODDGRP &DARALLOW &USVERS1

SIGVAR = VAR0 MASKNO:08467

TGNO = V522 OPMODE = BW MASKNO:06349

GCOS = JSUBORD &NOZON &C7GLARE &CCS7IUP &PODD MASKNO:06348

&USVERS0

SIGVAR = VAR0 MASKNO:08467

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

TGNO = O1INT OPMODE = OG MASKNO:06349

GCOS = PULSDIAL &NONSEQ MASKNO:06348

SIGVAR = VAR0 MASKNO:08467

TGNO = O0INT OPMODE = OG MASKNO:06349

GCOS = PULSDIAL &NONSEQ MASKNO:06348

SIGVAR = VAR0 MASKNO:08467

END JOB 8454

Fig. 70

Page 127: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

127

XITE/AD366L8003E/NCGCBK1V1530/T46/000 02-03-20 08:21:44

8455 NetM X25TH4N2 2871/08468

DISPTGRP:TGNO=X,FORMAT=BLOCKED;

TGNO OPMODE NO. OF NO. OF

TRUNKS BLOCKED TRUNKS

------+------+-------+--------------

S0CCS0 BW 1 0

S1CCS0 BW 1 0

S0SPC0 BW 1 0

S1SPC0 BW 1 0

V522 BW 30 0

VTC1 BW 60 0

RASTC3 BW 62 30

VTC3 BW 31 0

MLIO BW 30 0

……………………………………………………………………………..

……………………………………………………………………………..

O1INT OG 2 0

O0INT OG 2 0

END JOB 8455

XITE/AD366L8003E/NCGCBK1V1530/T46/000 02-03-20 08:22:04

8463 NetM X25TH4N2 2871/06349

DISPTGRP:TGNO=X,FORMAT=SHORT;

TGNO = S0CCS0 OPMODE = BW MASKNO:06349

TGNO = S1CCS0 OPMODE = BW

TGNO = S0SPC0 OPMODE = BW

TGNO = S1SPC0 OPMODE = BW

TGNO = V522 OPMODE = BW

TGNO = VTC1 OPMODE = BW

TGNO = RASTC3 OPMODE = BW

......................

......................

TGNO = STC3 OPMODE = IC

TGNO = MLII OPMODE = IC

TGNO = O1INT OPMODE = OG

TGNO = O0INT OPMODE = OG

END JOB 8463

Fig. 71

XITE/AD366L8003E/NCGCBK1V1530/T46/000 02-03-20 08:22:38

8474 NetM X25TH4N2 2871/06349

DISPTGRP:TGNO=X,OPMODE=OG;

TGNO = O1INT OPMODE = OG MASKNO:06349

GCOS = PULSDIAL &NONSEQ MASKNO:06348

SIGVAR = VAR0 MASKNO:08467

TGNO = O0INT OPMODE = OG MASKNO:06349

GCOS = PULSDIAL &NONSEQ MASKNO:06348

SIGVAR = VAR0 MASKNO:08467

END JOB 8474

Fig. 72

Page 128: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

128

5.3 Important GCOS Values

5.3.1 Trunk Seizure Mechanisms

Seizure mechanisms for non CCS7 trunk groups

��Non Sequential Search (GCOS=NONSEQ):

Following the 'First in - First out' principle, it is always the trunk that has been in idle state for the longest period of time that is seized in this case. This facilitates the largest degree of even distribution on the trunks of one trunk group. This is achieved by linking a trunk that changes from the "seized" state to the "idle" state into the last position of the trunk list.

��Rotating Search (GCOS=ROTARY)

Seizes the next idle trunk following the trunk that was seized for the previous call setup attempt.

��Sequential Search (GCOS=SEQSRCH)

The idle trunk with the smallest line number is seized first.

��Sequential Search Backward (GCOS=SEQBKWD)

The idle trunk with the highest line number is seized first. In combination with SEQSRCH in the neighboring switching center the highest possible level of glaring protection (seizure of both sides quasi simultaneously with release on both sides) is achieved for non CCS7 methods.

In case of bothway trunk groups it is possible to give in one of the two exchanges all trunks the priority for glare situations: GCOS=GLARE.

Page 129: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

129

Line No = 1

Line No = 2

Line No = 3

Line No = 4

Line No = 5

initial situation Line No 1 seized

by own switch

Line No = 1

Line No = 2

Line No = 3

Line No = 4

Line No = 5

Line No = 1

Line No = 2

Line No = 3

Line No = 4

Line No = 5

Line No 2 seized

by own switch

Line No = 1

Line No = 3

Line No = 4

Line No = 5

Line No = 2

Line No 2 released

SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENSFirst Choice 1. call attempt Line No = 1

First Choice 2. call attempt Line No = 2

First Choice 3. call attempt Line No = 3

First Choice 4. call attempt Line No = 4

First Choice 5. call attempt Line No = 5

SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENSLine No = 1

Line No = 2

Line No = 3

Line No = 4

Line No = 5

First Choice

Trunk List

Overflow

First Choice

Overflow

Fig. 73 Non-sequential, rotary and sequential Search, sequential search backwards

TIP The seizure mechanism can be changed for existing trunk groups using the command ENTR TGDAT: GCOS=

Page 130: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

130

Seizure mechanisms with implicit glare rules used for CCS7 trunk groups: GCOS=PRIOPRE or PGRPPRE

These two seizure mechanisms can only be used on CCS7 trunk groups. In both cases each switch has grouped the trunks of an outgoing / bothway trunk group in two different lists:

��one list contains the trunks for which this switch is prioritized in case of a glare situation (both switches try to seize the same trunk), i.e. it continues the call set up in case of glare.

��the other list contains the trunks for which this switch is not prioritized in case of a glare situation, i.e. it has to give up the call set up in case of glare.

Which trunks are belonging to the prioritized and which to the non prioritized list depends on the SPC value of the adjacent switches and the CIC value of the trunks. One of two different concepts described above can be used (both switches connected by a trunk group have to use the same concept):

��The decision is taken in both switches depending on the CIC and the SPC. The switch with the higher SPC has priority on the even CICs and vice versa (GCOS value PRIOPRE).

��The decision is taken on the basis of so-called CIC groups and the SPC. The CICs 1...15 form the group 0, the CICs 16...31 form the group 1 and so on. The switch with the higher SPC has priority on the even CIC groups and vice versa (GCOS value PGRPPRE).

In other words, the uneven CICs or the CICs of the uneven group are in the priority list in the switching center with lower SPC and the even CICs (or the CICs of the even groups) are in the non priority list. In the partner switching center this is exactly the other way around to avoid glaring as much as possible. This rule for the handling of the glare situation is indicated with the GCOS value C7GLARE. It is automatically set if either GCOS=PRIOPRE or PGRPPRE is entered.

The seizure methods applying in the priority list and in the non priority list differ:

��Priority list: First in First out, i.e. the same procedure as with NONSEQ

��Non priority list: Last in First Out, i.e. the trunk cleared last would be seized next

This is important as the non priority list corresponds to the priority list in the partner switch, i.e. even with seizures from the non priority list glares are still avoided as much as possible.

Page 131: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

131

SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS

CIC=<pcm>-1

CIC=<pcm>-2

CIC=<pcm>-3

CIC=<pcm>-4

SPC=n-o-p-1 SPC=n-o-p-7

prioritizednon prioritized

prioritized

non prioritized prioritized

prioritized non prioritized

non prioritized

....

CIC = <pcm>-1

CIC = <pcm>-3

CIC = <pcm>-5

CIC = <pcm>-7

CIC = <pcm>-2

CIC = <pcm>-4

CIC = <pcm>-6

CIC = <pcm>-8

Priority List

non Priority List

CIC = <pcm>-1

CIC = <pcm>-3

CIC = <pcm>-5

CIC = <pcm>-7

CIC = <pcm>-2

CIC = <pcm>-4

CIC = <pcm>-6

CIC = <pcm>-8

Priority List

non Priority List

First In First Out

Last In First Out

GCOS= PRIOPRE

Fig. 74 Priority land non priority lists in case of GCOS=PRIOPRE

TIP

Seizure mechanisms SEQSRCH / SEQBKWD / NONSEQ / ROTARY can also be used on CCS7 TGRP. In this case following glare rules can be selected:

��When explicitly entering the GCOS=C7GLARE the following glare rule applies on the CCS7 trunk group:

higher SPC: priority on even CICs / CIC groups with even number

lower SPC: priority on uneven CICs / CIC groups with uneven number.

��When explicitly entering the GCOS=GLARE in one of the two exchanges, this exchange has priority on all trunks of this trunk group.

Page 132: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

132

Page 133: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

133

SIEMENS SIEMENS

GCOS=PGRPPRE

CIC=<pcm>-1

CIC=<pcm>-2

CIC=<pcm>-16

CIC=<pcm>-17

SPC=n-o-p-1

non prioritized

prioritized

SIEMENS SIEMENS

SPC=n-o-p-7

prioritized

non prioritized

Group 0

Group 1

....

....

CIC = <pcm>-16

CIC = <pcm>-17

CIC = <pcm>-18

CIC = <pcm>-19

CIC = <pcm>-1

CIC = <pcm>-2

CIC = <pcm>-3

CIC = <pcm>-4

Priority List

non Priority List

CIC = <pcm>-16

CIC = <pcm>-17

CIC = <pcm>-18

CIC = <pcm>-19

CIC = <pcm>-1

CIC = <pcm>-2

CIC = <pcm>-3

CIC = <pcm>-4

Priority List

non Priority List

First In First Out

Last In First Out

Fig.75 Prioritized CIC groups

Page 134: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

134

5.3.2 Zoning and Ticket Generation

It is possible to administer the billing procedure for incoming connection trunk group specifically by means of the GCOS parameter.

��GCOS=ZON

The zoning must be performed for this call. In other words, zone points for incoming inter exchange calls need to be created in the digit zone translator.

��GCOS=AMAREQD

General activation of the AMA ticket generation.

Page 135: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

135

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SIEMENS SIEMENS

GCOS=ZON

Zone Translator

CODE ->

ZOPT

Fig. 76 Billing control by trunk group parameter GCOS = ZON

Page 136: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

136

5.3.3 Signaling Specification

The signaling method used for the trunks of a trunk group is specified by means of the parameter GCOS

ISUP - TGRP

��GCOS = CCS7IUP Signaling to other exchanges via CCS No 7 ISDN User Part (ISUP)

��SIGVAR = VARx The VARx is used to differentiate between ISUP variants in the LTG:

VAR0 defines that the CdPA in the IAM may contain maximally 16 digits (as recommended by ITU/ETSI for ISUP92)

VAR1 defines that there is no restriction concerning the maximum number of digits of the IAM parameter CdPA (as recommended by ITU/ETSI for ISUP97)

VAR15 defines that only signaling messages/parameters according to the ITU-T recommended ISUP767 are used.

��PROTTAB=… (or GCOS=PROPn&PROPm&.....) : For SS7-ISUP you can define the functional range of supplementary services supported for this TGRP by the ISUP signaling (administration of the so called ISUP protocol check).

Since V13 you may use for this purpose instead of the PROP values the parameter PROTTAB (CRTGRP) or NPROTTAB (MODTGRP). By this you can assign one out of 64 so called protocol tables. Which supplementary services are supported by which protocol table can be administered by CR/MOD PROTTAB.

Whether the PROP values of the GCOS parameter or the parameter PROTTAB have to be used, can be defined by an APS parameter (patch).

TIP

To differentiate between national and international ISUP you have to use the parameter NETIND of the DPC a TGRP is leading to.

Page 137: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

137

Non ISUP - TGRP

��GCOS=MFCR2/MFCR1/MFNO5/PULSDIAL....

Other signaling methods that can be used apart from CCS No7, e.g. in direction to analog exchanges:

MFCR2 Multifrequency R2

MFCR1 Multifrequency R1

MFNO5 Multifrequency No 5

MFV DTMF for USA PBX with DID

PULSDIAL Decadic signaling

NOTDIAL Connection of PBX without DID

RINGDOWN Connection of trunk for operator traffic (e.g. CCITT no. 1). No register signaling is used. That is, the operator performs the seizure on both sides or the prefix digits inserted in the incoming trunk are used for seizure.

Example trunk group to/from a partner ISDN exchange

CR TGRP:

TGNO=U008F, OPMODE=BW, ORIG1=140,

GCOS=ZON&CCS7IUP&PROP1&PRIOPRE

SIGVAR=VAR1;

Fig. 77 Examples of CR TGRP

Page 138: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

138

5.4 Overload Control

When an overload is recognized in the CP or in the LTGs, the GPs in the LTGs will reject new call requests from certain priority classes.

In order to do so, the LTGs determine the so-called global overflow level from the higher of the values of the (local) CP overload level and the LTG overload level.

Corresponding to the global overload levels, 0...6, the ports connected to the subscriber lines and trunk groups are divided into a total of 7 priority levels.

The principle is that all seizures are rejected if their priority class is less than the global overload level, all others are accepted and processed normally.

In the EWSD, subscriber lines and trunk groups are divided into cyclically varying and fixed priority classes. This measure not only distributes the effects of overloads, but also makes it possible to service particular types of connection preferentially in an overloaded situation.

Priorities are issued as follows:

��Overload priority handling for subscribers

Normal subscribers are divided into 4 equal groups: Every group is given a "random" priority class of 0.... Every 30 seconds, the priority is automatically replaced, i.e. the assignment is changed cyclically between groups 0 to 3. This means that they have an equal chance of achieving a connection setup during an overload situation.

Priority subscribers are given priority class 5 by COS=SUBPRIO.

��Overload priority handling for trunk groups

Priority trunk groups are given priority class 0 to 6 by GCOS=LPRIO0 to LPRIO6

Normal trunk groups are split into 5 equal groups (no LPRIOn entered): Every group is given a "random" priority class of 1.... Every 30 seconds, the priority is automatically replaced, i.e. the assignment is changed cyclically between groups 1 to 5. This means that they have an equal chance of achieving a connection setup during an overload situation.

TIP

Each of the global overload level values, 0...6, generally corresponds to a particular traffic rejection rate, determined by the allocation of subscribers and trunk groups to the various priority classes. Overload level 7 is only used by the CP, in order to be able to effect a total stoppage of call processing in special cases - e.g. a recovery.

Page 139: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

139

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DLULTG

0

1

2

3

5

Priority

swapped

cyclically

every 30 s

Assigned

by MML

command

4

1

2

3

Priority

swapped

cyclically

every 30 s

or:

Fixed

assignment

by MML

(GCOS=LPRIOn)

5

6

Assigned

by MML

command only

(GCOS=LPRIO6)

Priority

trunk groups:

Normal

trunk groups:

Normal

subscriber:

Priority

subscribers:

Fig. 78

Page 140: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

140

5.5 Further Values of Trunk Groups

5.5.1 Further GCOS Values

��MFC Categories If the traffic in an exchange is to be routed depending on the MFC category, but this cannot be signaled due to the signaling system, the category can be assigned as trunk group data to incoming and bothway trunk groups.

��INTLTRK - International trunk Used in international gateway exchanges e.g. to add the originating country code to the calling party address for outgoing calls on this trunk group.

��Traffic Classes It is possible to prevent access to certain destinations by allocating a traffic class TRACLx to the incoming or bothway trunk groups. Traffic coming in on this trunk group is then rejected if the CdPA leads to a traffic type code point TRATCPT with a traffic type TRAT for which the TRACL of the TRGP is blocked (administered by ENTR TRABLOCK).

��LOCTRAFF - Local traffic Used for traffic to and from other exchanges in the same local network. It is required to obtain correct traffic assignment for traffic measurement parameter: REC TRAFLOW.

��SATLINK - Satellite link Specifies, that the trunk group uses a satellite transmission system. Normally maximum one satellite link from originating to terminating exchange is allowed in order to avoid to high propagation delay.

��DCMS - Digital circuit multiplex system Specifies that the trunk group leads to a digital circuit multiplex system. Since voice and non-voice traffic are handled differently by DCMS, it is important for the system to know whether or not a DCMS is being assessed.

��REDIREX - Redirecting exchange Redirects an unsuccessful call (e.g. subscriber busy) back to an exchange which has an REDIREX incoming trunk group. The call is then redirected to the operator.

��OPERTRK - Operator trunk Indicates that this trunk group leads to an exchange in which an operator can be reached. Decides, e.g., in the case of descending international traffic with operator request, whether an operator is inserted in the local exchange or the request is forwarded to the next exchange.

��SUPCBLK - Suppress code blocking Indicates that code blocks (Code Block Points with 100% blocking) are ignored for calls coming in via this TGRP.

Page 141: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

141

GCOS values for

MFCCAT

Meaning

JSUBORDTESTEQ

OPOSDATRANS

ISUBORDIDATRANSIOPOS

CAT11...15

Non-prioritized subscriber (national)Test call (national)

Operator (national)Data transmission (national)

Non-prioritized subscriber (international)Data transmission (international)Operator (international)

Reserve used country specifically (seeCML)

SUBMFC Subscriber priority requested

Fig. 79

00: TRATCPT with TRAT=INAT

TRACL10: blocked for TRAT INAT

TRACL20: not blocked for TRAT INAT

IGE

GCOS=TRACL10

Local exchange

GCOS=TRACL 20

Incoming call with 00 is rejected

Incoming call with 00 is throughconnected

national

transit

exchange

Fig. 80

Page 142: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

142

5.5.2 PREFIX, ORIG and LAC

Values which are required for the digit translation, but cannot be transmitted, can be assigned to the incoming / bothway trunk group.

This concerns:

��Prefix digits (PREFIX) The digits defined here precede the received digits.

��Originating mark 1 (ORIG1) evaluated for determination of the code point CPT

��Originating mark 2 (ORIG2) evaluated for determination of the zone point ZOPT

��Originating mark for destination control (ORIGDC) evaluated in case of Code Block Points

��Local area code (LAC)

TIP

��The ORIG1/2 of the TGRP can be overwritten by the A-DN digit translator ORIGDAT

��The LAC of the TGRP can be overwritten by the LAC of the CdPA

Page 143: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

143

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EWSDGCOS=CCS7IUP

IAM with

CdPA=8972241429 &

NA=national number

analog

switchGCOS=PULSDIAL

B-DN=8972241429

CPT= 089

DEST=MUNICH

PREFIX=0

Fig. 81

Page 144: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

144

Page 145: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

145

6 Trunks

Page 146: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

146

6.1 Functionality and MML Commands

A trunk represents a time slot on a PCM carrier that is connected to an LTU in the LTG and assigned to a trunk group administratively.

WARNING Before the first trunk can be allocated to a trunk group with CCS No 7 signaling (GCOS=CCS7IUP) the trunk group needs to be linked to a CCS No7 signaling point to determine where the signaling message is to be sent to, or for which trunk group the signaling message was received. This linkage is generated with the MML command ENTR C7TGREL.

A trunk is defined by the following parameters:

��TGNO: six character trunk group number. Provides the allocation to a trunk group.

��CIC: Circuit Identification Code. Identification of the trunk for ISDN User Part (ISUP). The CIC is sent together with the corresponding CCS No 7 message (e.g. IAM Initial Address Message). The CIC consists of two information units: a-b.

a: is usually used for the PCM carrier number (values 0...511 for PCM30).

b: is usually used for the time slot. (values 0...31).

The CIC value must be identical in neighboring switching centers, otherwise faults will occur in the circuit seizure.

��LNO: Line Number: Continual identification of the trunk within a trunk group. If this is not entered the LNO is issued by the system. Used for administratively addres-sing of the trunk.

��Equipment Number: Consists of the following units:

LTG= <tsg>-<tsg highway number> , LC=<line trunk unit>-<timeslot>

��LCOS: Line Class of Service. Contains values for controlling the signaling on the trunk (project specific).

��TRRANGE: Trunk range. With this parameter you can enter the number of trunks on a PCM carrier that are to be created with one command. The CIC is auto-matically counted on in ascending order in this case.

The TRRANGE is applied in ascending order beginning with the indicated equipment number or CIC. In this case the LNOs are used in ascending order system internally. Canceling trunks may cause problems if they were not created with TRRANGE and not in the sequence of the ascending equipment number. E.g. 1. LTG=0-6, LC=3-3, 2. LTG=0-6, LC=3-2, 3. LTG=0-6, LC=3-1, 4.LTG=0-6, LC=3-4 and then ascending. If you were to cancel with TRANGE now: LTG=0-6, LC=3-1, TRRANGE=31,... the command would be rejected as there are only 29 trunks left from LC=3-1 on (because the trunks with LC=3-3 & 3-2 have lower LNO than the one with LC=3-1).

Page 147: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

147

Trunk Group Relation

ENTR C7TGREL: TGNO= , DPC= , NETIND= ;

Trunk Administration

CR TRUNK: TGNO= , LTG= , LC= , CIC= , LCOS= [,TRRANGE= ]

[,LNO=] [,BLK=];

CAN TRUNK: TGNO= ,{TRRANGE= | LNO= | CIC=};

DISP TRUNK: TGNO= , {CIC= | LNO=} [,LCOS=][,BLK=][,SORT=]

[,FORMAT=];

FORMAT ALL (all trunk data (default))

COUNT (total number of trunks & number of trunks matching selected

criteria

SORT OPMODE sorted according to the OPMODE

TGNO sorted according to the TGNO

Example for LCOS: DIGSIG Values

Application DIGSIG

No 7 Signalling Channel DIGSIG ..

ISUP Trunk DIGSIG ..

Remark:

• The administrative blocking of trunks is administered by ENTR / CAN TRDAT

• The maintenance blocking of trunks is administered by ENTR / CAN TMBLK

Fig. 82 Trunk administration

WARNING With CCS7 a maximum of 4096 trunks can be created to one partner exchange because only 4096 CIC values are available in the CCS7 ISUP messages according to ITU recommendations.

Nevertheless it is possible to extend the CIC to 13 or 14 bits (only with SSNC). In this case you may have up to 8191 or 16384 trunks between two nodes (if you want, all belonging to one trunk group)!

Page 148: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

148

XITE/AD366L8003E/NCGCBK1V1530/T46/000 02-03-20 08:39:28

8572 NetM X25TH4N2 2871/09988

DISPTRUNK:TGNO=X;

TGNO = S0CCS0 OPMODE = BW LNO = 1 CIC = 0- 1 MASKNO:09988

LTG = 0- 2 LC = 0- 1 MASKNO:09989

LCOS = DIGSIG8 &CCS7IUP MASKNO:09998

TSTTYP = 0 MASKNO:09991

CONN = NUC MASKNO:40000

TGNO = S1CCS0 OPMODE = BW LNO = 1 CIC = 0- 1 MASKNO:09988

LTG = 0- 2 LC = 1- 1 MASKNO:09989

LCOS = DIGSIG8 &CCS7IUP MASKNO:09998

TSTTYP = 0 MASKNO:09991

CONN = NUC MASKNO:40000

TGNO = S0SPC0 OPMODE = BW LNO = 1 CIC = 0- 2 MASKNO:09988

LTG = 0- 2 LC = 0- 2 MASKNO:09989

LCOS = DIGSIG12 &CCS7IUP MASKNO:09998

TSTTYP = 0 MASKNO:09991

TGNO = S1SPC0 OPMODE = BW LNO = 1 CIC = 0- 2 MASKNO:09988

LTG = 0- 2 LC = 1- 2 MASKNO:09989

LCOS = DIGSIG12 &CCS7IUP MASKNO:09998

TSTTYP = 0 MASKNO:09991

........................................................................

........................................................................

TGNO = O0INT OPMODE = OG LNO = 2 MASKNO:09988

LTG = 0- 2 LC = 3- 3 MASKNO:09989

LCOS = DIGSIG4 &PULSDIAL MASKNO:09998

TSTTYP = 0 MASKNO:09991

END JOB 8572

Fig. 83

Page 149: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

149

XITE/AD366L8003E/NCGCBK1V1530/T47/000 02-03-20 08:46:33

8656 NetM X25TH4N2 2871/09988

DISPTRUNK:TGNO=X,BLK=ADMIN;

TGNO = RASTC3 OPMODE = BW LNO = 32 CIC = 1- 1 MASKNO:09988

LTG = 0- 4 LC = 3- 1 MASKNO:09989

LCOS = DIGSIG12 &CCS7IUP MASKNO:09998

BLK = ADMIN MASKNO:09999

TSTTYP = 0 MASKNO:09991

TGNO = RASTC3 OPMODE = BW LNO = 33 CIC = 1- 2 MASKNO:09988

LTG = 0- 4 LC = 3- 2 MASKNO:09989

LCOS = DIGSIG12 &CCS7IUP MASKNO:09998

BLK = ADMIN MASKNO:09999

TSTTYP = 0 MASKNO:09991

TGNO = RASTC3 OPMODE = BW LNO = 34 CIC = 1- 3 MASKNO:09988

LTG = 0- 4 LC = 3- 3 MASKNO:09989

LCOS = DIGSIG12 &CCS7IUP MASKNO:09998

BLK = ADMIN MASKNO:09999

TSTTYP = 0 MASKNO:09991

............................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................

TGNO = RASTC3 OPMODE = BW LNO = 61 CIC = 1-30 MASKNO:09988

LTG = 0- 4 LC = 3-30 MASKNO:09989

LCOS = DIGSIG12 &CCS7IUP MASKNO:09998

BLK = ADMIN MASKNO:09999

TSTTYP = 0 MASKNO:09991

END JOB 8656

Fig. 84

Page 150: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

150

6.2 Self-Supervision and Operational Status of Digital Trunks

The self supervision is running permanently for all trunks:

��If a fault is detected, the affected trunk is taken out of service automatically.

��If preset thresholds for unavailable trunks are exceeded a TGRP-alarm will occur.

The self supervision functions can be divided into different groups:

��Supervision of the status of the hardware used by the trunk:

a) status of the used LTG / DIU / PORT in the own exchange (ACT/CBL/MBL/UNA)

b) status of the used PDC in the own exchange (ACT/MAL/SAL)

��Supervision of manual blocking of trunks in the own exchange by MML command:

a) trunk is blocked for maintenance (ENTR TMBLK)

b) trunk is blocked for administration (ENTR TRDAT)

��Supervision of blocking and unblocking/reset messages sent back by the partner exchange because:

a) incoming / bothway trunk was blocked in the partner exchange (trunk group blocking is not reported)

b) LTG / DIU was conditionally blocked in the partner exchange

c) LTG / DIU is unavailable in the partner exchange (UNA/MBL)

��Supervision of the CCS7 signaling connection to the exchange the trunk is leading to:

a) availability/unavailability of the destination point of the partner exchange (ACT/UNA)

b) missing acknowledgement for blocking or unblocking/reset messages sent to partner exchange

��Optional supervisions activated trunk group individually (ENTR TMCNTL):

a) exceeding of call set up irregularity threshold (MDII)

b) exceeding of threshold for unusual short mean holding time (killer trunk status)

c) exceeding of threshold for extremely long call duration

Status change of trunks performed by the Self Supervision

The status change of the trunks performed by the self supervision is listed in the table beside.

Page 151: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

151

Event New trunk status in own exchange

DIU/LTG hardware failure in own exchange (UNA) NDIU/NLTG/NPRT

Blocking in own exchange of:

�� TRUNK or TGRP (MAINT / ADMIN)

�� LTG / DIU (maintenance blocking)

�� LTG / DIU (conditional blocking)

�� BMNT/BADM or GBMN/GBAD

�� MLTG/MDIU/MPRT

�� CLTG/CDIU/CPRT

PDC Service Alarm in own exchange NCAR & NMNI

PDC Maintenance Alarm in own exchange NCAR & NMNT

threshold exceeded for MDII / KILLERTRUNK supervision

AUTO

Unavailability of all CCS7 signaling routes to one partner destination point

CCSF, after 1 min. NSYN

Blocking of trunks (not trunk groups) in partner exchange (status change is backward signaled by a CCS7 blocking message)

MOBB (only used for trunks with CCS7ISUP signaling, in case of CAS the status BBAC/BPERM is set)

Conditional blocking of LTG/DIU in partner exchange (status change is backward signaled by a CCS7 blocking message)

MOBB (only used for trunks with CCS7ISUP signaling)

Unavailability (UNA/MBL) of LTG/DIU in partner exchange (status change is backward signaled by a CCS7 blocking message)

HOBB (only used for trunks with CCS7ISUP signaling)

Backward signaled blocking/unblocking/reset messages are not acknowledged by the partner exchange in between 15 min. although a CCS7 signaling route is available

C7SF (&NSYNP for unacknowledged RESET messages for releasing of before disturbed or administartive blocked trunks) (only used for trunks with CCS7ISUP signaling)

Fig. 85

Page 152: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

152

Displaying the Trunk Status

STAT TRUNK: TGNO = ...;

��search in a trunk group for active trunks (INC, OUT, INT) or trunks being ready for use (IDLE)

��information, if a trunk group contains signaling links (NUC)

��check out the problem in case of disturbed trunks (e.g. NCAR: Level 1 missing; C7SF/NSYN: no CCS7 signaling available; BMNT/BADM/MPRT/MDIU/MLTG: unit blocked by operator; NPRT/NLTG/NDIU: HW problem reported by EWSD; MOBB/HOBB: the problem is caused by the other side of a CCS7 link)

��output of the CIC (has to be identical in both exchanges)

STAT TRUNK: TGNO=…, STATSUM=Y;

��statistics concerning the current application of the trunks of a trunk group

STAT TRUNK: TGNO = X, CIC = ;

��fetch information about a trunk, whose CIC is known

STAT TRUNK: TGNO = X, STATUS = TGIND;

��output of all trunks which currently are affected by an indication

STAT TRUNK: TGNO = X, STATUS = TGALM;

��output of all trunks which currently have an alarm

STAT TRUNK: TGNO = ..., STATUS = INC & OUT & IDLE;

��output of all busy or idle trunks within a given trunk group

STAT PORT: LTG= <tsg> - <ltg>, LC= <diu>;

��output of trunks related to given ports

��ascertain, if a DIU contains active ports (INC, OUT, INT, BUSY) or ports ready for use (IDLE)

��check out the problem for disturbed ports (e.g. NCAR: Level 1 missing; C7SF: no CCS7 signaling available; BMNT/BADM/MPRT/MDIU/MLTG/MOBB: units blocked by operator; NPRT/NLTG/NDIU/HOBB: HW problem detected by EWSD; MOBB/HOBB: the problem is caused by the other side of a CCS7 link)

DISP CONN: LTG=<tsg> - <ltg>, LC=<diu>

��e.g. for checking out, if there are still connections using the DIU or if the DIU may be blocked for maintenance

Page 153: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

153

STAT TRUNK: TGNO = ...;

STAT TRUNK: TGNO=..., STATSUM = Y; STAT TRUNK: TGNO = X, CIC = ;

STAT TRUNK: TGNO = ..., STATUS = TGIND; STAT TRUNK: TGNO = ..., STATUS = TGALM; STAT TRUNK: TGNO = ..., STATUS = INC & OUT & IDLE;

STAT PORT: LTG= <ltgset> - <ltg>, LC= <diu> - [<timeslot>]; DISP CONN: LTG= <ltgset> - <ltg>, LC= <diu> [- <timeslot>];

Fig. 86

X722/AD399L8022/NCGCBK1V1530/P00/003 02-04-25 15:36:12

9463 NetM X25TH4N2 3069/00007

STATTRUNK:TGNO=X,STATSUM=Y; EXEC'D

TRUNK STATUS SUM OVERVIEW

TGNO STATUS SUM

-------+---------------+-------

S0CCS0 NUC & RNUC 1

S1CCS0 NUC & RNUC 1

S0SPC0 IDLE 1

S1SPC0 IDLE 1

I1INT MDIU 2

O1INT NCAR & NMNI 2

SSTAC2 RNUC & MDIU & 1

NMNI

SSX622 RNUC & MDIU & 1

NMNI

END JOB 9463

X722/AD399L8022/NCGCBK1V1530/P00/003

9464 NetM X25TH4N2 3069/00007

STATTRUNK:TGNO=X;

TRUNK STATUS LIST

TGNO LNO CIC EQTYP OPMODE LTG LC

-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+------+

S0CCS0 1 0- 1 TRUNK BW 0- 2 0- 1

S1CCS0 1 0- 1 TRUNK BW 0- 2 1- 1

S0SPC0 1 0- 2 TRUNK BW 0- 2 0- 2

S1SPC0 1 0- 2 TRUNK BW 0- 2 1- 2

I1INT 1 TRUNK IC 0- 2 2-17

I1INT 2 TRUNK IC 0- 2 2-18

O1INT 1 TRUNK OG 0- 2 3-17

O1INT 2 TRUNK OG 0- 2 3-18

SSTAC2 1 TRUNK IC 0- 4 1- 1

SSX622 1 TRUNK IC 0- 4 0- 1

END JOB 9464

Fig. 87

Page 154: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

154

6.3 Nailed-up Connection

6.3.1 Functionality

A nailed-up connection is a semi permanent connection between two ports which can be administered and is switched through by the switching network. The through-connection can be time-controlled or permanent. If trunk ports are switched in a nailed-up connection, naturally the respective port in the partner switching center needs to be switched too.

A typical application for a nailed-up connection is the through-connection of the CCS7 signaling link from the PCM timeslot (port) to a SILTD module of the CCNC or the LIC of the SSNC.

Page 155: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

155

LTG

SDC:LTG

Signaling

LinkPCM

SN0&1

Trunks

Nailed - up Connection

CCNCSDC:CCNC

SILTD s

LTGSDC:LTG

PCM

LTG

SDC:LTG

PCM

Trunks

Nailed - up Connection

Fig. 88 Nailed-up connection

Page 156: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

156

6.3.2 MML Commands

A nailed-up connection needs to be set up with the command CR NUC.

��As already mentioned, a nailed-up connection can be set up for traffic channels as well as for signaling links. Specify this in the parameter TYPE (PERM, MUX, TEST).

��Specify the ports to be linked with the parameters EQNIC and EQNOG (only for non trunk ports). In case of trunk ports you have to use LTGIC/LCIC and LTGOG/LCOG. In this case it is important that for LTGIC/LCIC you only enter ports within a trunk group that are incoming or bothway and for LTGOG/LCOG you only enter ports within a trunk group that are outgoing or bothway.

��In case of CCNC the ports of the SS7 signaling links on the PCM must always be set up as LTGIC/LCIC and the corresponding SILTD port as LTGOG/LCOG. The LTGOG value of the SILTD port is equal to the number of the highway the CCNC is connected to the switching network. The LCOG value of the SILTD port can be found in an allocation list (“pseudo LTU/PORT and SILTD”) in the TML (CR NUC).

NOTE Prerequisite: There must be trunk groups and trunks set up for the respective ports on the PCM.

After setting up the nailed-up connection it must be activated with the command ACT NUC. This activation can be performed as a permanent or time controlled activation.

Page 157: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

157

Nailed - up Connection Administration (NUC)

Creation of a NUC

CR NUC: NUC=, EQNIC=, EQNOG=, TYPE= ; or NUC=, LTGIC=, LCIC=, LTGOG=, LCOG=, TYPE=

Cancelation of a NUC

CAN NUC: NUC= ;

Activation of a NUC

ACT NUC: NUC= [,UNCOND=] [<,BEG= ,TER= ,IV= ,PER= ,BEGTIME= ,TERTIME=>];

Deactivation of a NUC

DACT NUC: NUC= [<,BEG= ,TER= ,IV= ,PER= ,BEGTIME= ,TERTIME=>];

Display of a NUC

DISP NUC: {NUC= [,EQN=] [,TYPE=] [,STATE=]} ;

Fig. 89 Administration of a nailed-up connection

Page 158: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

158

6.4 CCS No 7 Trunk Testing

A trunk that is signaled with CCS No 7 should be created with the blocking ADMIN and MAINT. Before the trunk is operated it must be tested. Prerequisite for this is the module RM:CTC in the LTG. Before testing the ADMIN blocking is taken out with the MML command CAN TRDAT. The test is carried out with the MML command TEST C7TRUNK. If the test was successful the maintenance blocking is also removed using the command CAN TMBLK.

Page 159: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

159

CR TRUNK:TGNO,LTC,LC,CIC

LCOS=<digsigxx>,

BLK=ADMIN&MAINT

CAN TRDAT:TGNO,CIC

BLK=ADMIN

TEST C7TRUNK: TGNO,

CIC or LNO

CAN TMBLK: TGNO,

CIC or LNO

Was the test successfull?

Y

N

Fault Clearance

according to the

output mask

Fig. 90 Trunk testing

Page 160: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

160

Page 161: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

161

7 Administration of Selective Trunk Reservation

Page 162: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

162

7.1 Functionality

The task of the feature trunk reservation consists in giving the operator the opportunity to allocate one or two trunk reservation levels to trunk groups. Each reservation level defines a series of free lines (max. all lines of the TGRP) within the trunk group, the seizure of which is only permitted if certain preset traffic criteria are fulfilled.

Thus, it is achieved that certain types of traffic are given preference or disadvantage on specific trunk groups, if the number of free trunks has reached the corresponding free trunk threshold value or fallen below it.

The calls rejected due to trunk reservation are given an INCEPT=TRSV. The connection requests rejected to trunk reservation are carried to an additional counter (i.e. per trunk group) of trunk group traffic measurement and of grade-of-service measurement (per exchange).

The following traffic criteria are relevant for trunk reservation:

Traffic criteria which depend on either the origination or on the destination:

��Traffic to preset destinations (i.e. code specific) Depending on the digits designed for routing in the exchange the traffic to certain destinations (e.g. 110 police or 112 fire brigade) shall be prioritized. Up to 16 code specific traffic criteria are possible in this case.

��Traffic to non hard to reach destinations By traffic monitoring it is possible to detect destinations with unusual low answer seizure rate, called hard to reach destinations. Traffic to non hard to reach destinations shall be prioritized.

��ISDN traffic This criteria depends on whether the connection’s A-side is an ISDN subscriber or a CCS7 ISUP trunk. Incoming ISDN traffic shall be prioritized on outgoing ISDN trunks as compared to non ISDN traffic.

��Priority traffic Traffic from subscribers with priority shall be prioritized.

��Traffic originated by preset incoming trunk groups Traffic coming in on predefined trunk groups shall be prioritized.

Traffic criteria depending on the used operating mode of bothway trunks:

��Incoming traffic Incoming traffic is prioritized as compared to outgoing traffic in case of a two way trunk.

Page 163: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

163

Traffic criteria which depend on the routes used during call setup:

��Primary traffic The traffic using a trunk as primary route shall be prioritized as compared to the traffic using the same trunk as overflow trunk.

��Route-traffic Traffic allocated to certain routes is prioritized

��ISDN route traffic Only ISDN traffic which is allocated to certain routes is prioritized, on the precondition that the criteria ISDN traffic is fulfilled at the same time.

SIEMENS SIEMENS

regarded trunk group

not reserved trunks

reserved trunks

for traffic which matches

first or second specified criterion

reserved trunks for traffic which

matches second specified criterion

ISD

N tra

ffic

max. 4095

max. 4095

Orig

anatin

gtru

nk g

roup

Prio

rity traffic

Route specific ISDN traffic

Destination specific traffic

Primary traffic

Route specific traffic

Non hard to reach traffic

incom

ing tra

ffic on b

oth

way tru

nk g

roups

Fig. 91 Trunk reservation

Page 164: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

164

7.2 MML Commands for Trunk Reservation

Administration of Traffic Criteria for Trunk Reservation

��Traffic criteria with global meaning not to be defined by MML command :

ISDNTRAF (ISDN traffic), PRIMTRAF(Primary traffic), PRIOTRAF (Prioritized traffic), INCSZURE (Incoming traffic), NONHTR (Non Hard To Reach traffic)

��Exchange specific traffic criteria which need to be predefined by MML command ENTR TRSVCRIT (further commands: DISP TRSVCRIT / CAN TRSVCRIT):

ENTR TRSVCRIT: CRIT=DESTCD01...DESTCD16, CODE=... Up to 16 code related traffic criteria can be created, i.e. to each of the 16 symbolic values DESTCDxx one digit combination can be assigned.

ENTR TRSVCRIT: CRIT=ORIGTR01...ORIGTR08, TGNO=... Up to 8 originating trunk group related traffic criteria can be created, i.e. to each of the 8 symbolic values ORIGTR01...ORIGTR08 one or several incoming/bothway TGNO (but only one per command) can be assigned.

ENTR TRSVCRIT: CRIT=ROUTTRAF or ISDNROUT, DEST=..., ROUTE=<number of the route in the routing table of this destination> One or several routes may be marked with the criteria ROUTTRAF or ISDNROUT (can only be assigned to routes formed by trunk groups with CCS7ISUP).

Each definition of code or origin specific criteria is identified additionally by a symbolic name (either entered with parameter NAME or assigned automatically, only relevant for administration by Q3).

Administration of Trunk Reservation Traffic Elements (Traffic Criteria Packages)

A traffic criteria package is created with the command ENTR TRSVTRAF. It defines two lists of criteria (global or exchange specific created criteria) and is identified by a symbolic name (either defined under the parameter NAME or assigned automatically). Further commands: DISP / MOD / CAN TRSVTRAF

All criteria values entered under the parameter CRIT2 are internally automatically added to the criteria list 1 and the criteria list 2, all criteria values entered under the parameter CRIT1 are added to the criteria list 1 only. This can be displayed with DISP TRSVTRAF (here the displayed lists are called CRIT1 and CRIT2). This means that with the parameters CRIT1 and CRIT2 the two lists of traffic criteria are predefined for further assignment to TGRPs. In the CML you find which of the criteria are incompatible, i.e. cannot be combined in one list. Furthermore some combinations of CRIT1 and CRIT2 are forbidden.

Page 165: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

165

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Predefinition of criteria

ENTR TRSVCRIT: CRIT = DESTCD01...16, CODE = ....;

ENTR TRSVCRIT: CRIT = {ISDNROUT|ROUTTRAF}, DEST = ...., ROUTE =....;

ENTR TRSVCRIT: CRIT = ORIGTR01..08, TGNO=...;

Definition of trunk reservation traffic elements

ENTR TRSVTRAF: NAME =

CRIT1 =

CRIT2=

DESTCD01...16

PRIMTRAF

ROUTTRAF / ISDNROUT

ISDNROUT

INCSZURE

PRIOTRAF

ORIGTR01...08

ORIG01PR...08PR

NONHTR

The parameter values in CRIT1 and 2 can be linked by &

Fig. 92 MML commands for trunk reservation

Page 166: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

166

Trunk Group specific Administration of the Trunk Reservation Control (Allocation of a Criteria Package and Reservation Levels to a Trunk Group)

The predefined criteria packages have to be allocated to the reservation levels of a

trunk group. This allocation itself is performed by the command ENTR TRSVCNTL

and identified by a symbolic name (either entered with parameter NAME or assigned automatically, only relevant for administration by Q3).

The parameter TRSVTRAF contains the symbolic name of the criteria package assigned to this trunk group (parameter TGNO).

The parameter LEVEL1 defines the number of trunks as an absolute value, PERCLEV1 as a percentage value reserved for the traffic which matches at least one of the criteria defined under the parameter CRIT1 or CRIT2 of the assigned TRSVTRAF (i.e. one of the criteria of the internal criteria list 1).

The parameter LEVEL2 defines the number of trunks as an absolute value, PERCLEV2 as a percentage value reserved for the traffic which matches at least one of the criteria defined under the parameter CRIT2 of the assigned TRSVTRAF (i.e. one of the criteria of the internal criteria list 2).

Inside the lists the criteria are linked with an OR condition. Exception: In case of the criterion “non hard to reach”, it is mandatory that the traffic matches at least the condition “non hard to reach”.

With TRCNTRL=CANCEL all call set ups rejected on this trunk group because of trunk reservation are forwarded to the intercept handling (INCEPT=TRSV). With TRCNTRL=SKIP for all call set ups rejected on this trunk group because of trunk reservation overflow to the next available route is performed.

Page 167: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

167

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Definition of the trunk reservation control

ENTR TRSVCNTL: TGNO =

TRSVTRAF =

{LEVEL1 =

PERCLEV1=

[{LEVEL2 =

PERCLEV2=

TRCNTRL =

1...4095

1.. 100 }

1...4095

1...100 }]

{CANCEL/SKIP}

Fig. 93

TIP It is principally possible to have up to 16383 trunks in a TGRP. Therefore the ISUP signaling has to be adapted (CIC with 14 instead of 12 bits). In this case the max. value of the parameters LEVEL1/2 is 16383.

Page 168: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

168

7.3 Traffic-oriented Example

Task:

��ISDN traffic has the highest priority on the trunk group “STUTT” (10 trunks are reserved)

��Primary traffic regardless if ISDN or not has priority over non ISDN alternative traffic (5 trunks are reserved)

Solution:

Reservation of idle trunks for primary and ISDN traffic:

ENTR TRSVTRAF: NAME = RES1,

CRIT1 = PRIMTRAF,

CRIT2 = ISDNTRAF;

ENTR TRSVCNTL: TGNO = STUTT,

TRSVTRAF = RES1

LEVEL1 = 10,

LEVEL2 = 5,

TRCNTL ={SKIP|CANCEL};

��If only 10 trunks of trunk group “STUTT” are idle, only primary traffic (CRIT1) or ISDN traffic (CRIT2) is allowed. Calls originated by analog subscribers to for example Augsburg (alternate traffic) go via the next overflow trunk group (TRCNTRL=SKIP) available) or are rejected (TRCNTRL=CANCEL).

��If only 5 trunks of trunk group “STUTT” are idle, only ISDN traffic is allowed. Any calls originated by non ISDN subscribers go via the next overflow trunk group or are rejected.

Page 169: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

169

SIEMENS SIEMENSSIEMENS SIEMENS

SIEMENS SIEMENS

SIEMENS SIEMENS

Trunk group “STUTT”

Munich

Stuttgart

KarlsruheAugsburg

(Primary route toStuttgart and Karlsruhe,

Overflow route to Augsburg)

Primary route

to Augsburg

overflow

5 trunks reserved for ISDN traffic only

5 trunks reserved for primary traffic or ISDN traffic

not reserved trunks

.

.

.

.

.

.

Fig. 94 Traffic oriented reservation

Example trunk reservation

ENTR TRSVTRAF: NAME = RES1,

CRIT1 = PRIMTRAF,

CRIT2 = ISDNTRAF;

ENTR TRSVCNTL: TGNO = STUTT,TRSVTRAF = RES1,LEVEL1= 10,LEVEL2 = 5,TRCNTL={SKIP|CANCEL};

Fig. 95 MML command for priority on primary and ISDN primary traffic

Page 170: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

170

7.4 Code-oriented Example

Task:

The connection to a service number of the government (for example CODE=07111122) has priority over all other connections on the trunk group “STUTT” (10 trunks reserved).

Solution:

A number of idle lines (max. 15) is reserved for calls to the destination government.

ENTR TRSVCRIT: CRIT = DESTCD01,

CODE = 07111122;

ENTR TRSVTRAF: NAME = RES2,

CRIT1 = DESTCD01;

ENTR TRSVCNTL: TGNO = STUTT,

TRSVTRAF = RES2,

LEVEL1 = 10,

TRCNTL = {SKIP|CANCEL};

If only 10 lines in trunk group “STUTT” are idle, just calls to destination „government“ (code 07111122) are allowed. All other calls on trunk group “STUTT” are rejected or go via an overflow trunk group until there are at least 11 idle lines.

Page 171: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

171

SIEMENS SIEMENS

SIEMENS SIEMENS

SIEMENS SIEMENS

Trunk group “STUTT”

Munich

Stuttgart

Karlsruhe

(used for traffic to Stuttgart and Karlsruhe)

10 trunks reserved for

traffic with CdPA starting

with CODE = 07111122

not reserved trunks

.

.

.

.

.

.

CODE=

07111122

0711 1122

Fig. 96 Code oriented trunk reservation

Example trunk resrevation

ENTR TRSVCRIT: CRIT = DESTCD01,

CODE = 07111122;

ENTR TRSVTRAF: NAME = RES2,

CRIT1 = DESTCD01;

ENTR TRSVCNTL: TGNO = STUTT,

TRSVTRAF = RES2,

LEVEL1 = 10,

TRCNTL ={SKIP|CANCEL};

Fig. 97 MML command for priority for traffic to CODE=1122

Page 172: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

172

Page 173: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

173

8 Administration of the Carrier Access Code CAC Dependent Routing in Deregulated Networks

Page 174: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

174

Due to deregulation, new competitors offering communication services are appearing on the telecommunications market. Routing must therefore be expanded for the handling of new operators (carriers). Carrier specific administrative functions are being introduced to this, and standard routing is being expanded and adapted.

A carrier access code (CAC) has been introduced. This consists of the carrier code, which is preceded by the carrier prefix (optional). Together, there can be no more than 6 digits.

The carrier prefix is a string of digits shared by all carriers in the network, with which all carrier access codes begin. It is meant to facilitate the administration of carriers and can contain a maximum of 3 digits.

The carrier code is a string of digits which uniquely identifies the carrier in the network. It is attached to the carrier prefix. Only one carrier prefix can be administered for the entire network. The individual administration of several prefixes is not possible.

Page 175: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

175

CAR A

CAR B

Local network, Augsburg Local network, Munich

CAR B

CAR A

Long Distance Network

CAR A

CAR B

CAR A

CAR B

A-side

B-side

Fig. 98

Carrier Access Code CAC

Carrier Prefix

(e.g. 010 in Germany)

Carrier Code

(xyz)

Fig. 99

Page 176: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

176

8.1 Input Format for Dialing Information with CAC

From a purely mathematical point of view, the introduction of the CAC brings the maximum total length of a national dialing sequence to 24 digits (6 CAC + 6 LAC + 12 DN), which means that the exchanges have to be able to evaluate codes with up to 24 digits.

The CCS7ISUP parameter nature of address NADI for the Called Party Address is up to now built up by the evaluation of the traffic discrimination code created with ENTR DNATT: PFXNAT=, PFXINAT=. As long this procedure is not changed the subscriber will always need to dial the traffic discrimination digit after the CAC.

TIP At the moment the CAC is not signaled on international trunks.

Page 177: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

177

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dialing Information for National Calls

Carrier Access Code

(CAC)

optional

Local Area Code DN

Prefix

optional

CarrierCode

trafficdiscrimination

code

local network

max. 6 digits max. 6 digits max. 12 digits

(Worst Case)

Fig. 100

Page 178: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

178

8.2 Possibilities for Carrier Selection

��-call-specific carrier selection (CALL BY CALL method)

The A-subscriber can choose an existing carrier for each call individually by entering a complete CAC digit combination before the actual directory number.

��-priority carriers for subscribers (PRESELECT method)

A priority carrier can be defined for each subscriber in the subscriber data base. It is used if no CAC is dialed.

��-priority carrier for exchanges

A priority carrier can be specified for the whole exchange, which can be understood as a default setting. If the Called Party Address does not start with a CAC, then the system uses the exchange priority carrier, in the event that no subscriber priority carrier is specified.

The following priorities are valid for carrier selection with normal subscribers (listed in order of decreasing priority):

Carrier defined explicitly by the dialed Called Party Address

highest priority

Priority carrier registered in the subscriber/PBX line data base

Priority carrier registered in the PBX data base

Priority carrier of the exchange lowest priority

TIP

��If a carrier is specified, regardless of how, then overflow to another carrier will normally not take place in case of all trunks busy.

��If a CAC is not specified by the subscriber nor a priority carrier defined, then the standard code point without CAC is selected.

��If a CAC was used in the digit translation, this CAC will be signaled to the next exchange. In the CCS7ISUP IAM the CAC is transmitted either as part of the Called Party Address CdPA or in the field Transit Network Selection Control TSNC.

��In EWSD all CAC present in the country have to be created.

Page 179: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

179

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-subscriberdials a CAC

A-LTG

A-subscriberdata:Priority CAC digit

translationin CP

B-LTG

CAC isincluded inthe ISUPmessageIAM

CAC isincluded inthe ISUPmessageIAM

ExchangePriority CAC

Fig. 101

Page 180: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

180

8.3 MML Commands for CAC Administration

Creating the carrier prefix

ENTR DNATT: PFXCAC=

The carrier prefix is a string of digits shared by all carriers in the entire national network with which all carrier access codes begin. It comprises a maximum of 3 digits. The prefix can also be created if carrier access codes (CACs) have already been created. All existing CACs are checked to be sure they begin with the same digits, which are now defined as the prefix.

Creating a carrier:

CR CAC: CARRIER= , CAC= ,

[, EXCCACn=] [, OWNCAC= , ROWNCAC=][, SCIALLOW=]

[, DEFNA=];

��The parameter CARRIER defines the name of the carrier. It can be chosen freely but must be unique to the exchange.

��The Carrier Access Code is determined with the parameter CAC. This is a maximum of 6 digits long, is unique to the national network and contains - if available - the carrier prefix digits as well.

��If a exchange priority carrier should be used, it is created with EXCCAC1 / 2=YES. One or two carrier can be created as the exchange priority carrier. Which of the two is used depends on the dialed CdPA.

��The distinction between CAC of foreign carriers and the CAC of the own network is made with the parameter OWNCAC.

Only one CAC can be created as the own network CAC (OWNCAC=YES).

Functionality of ROWNCAC=YES: If the subscriber dials the OWNCAC in order e.g. to overwrite his priority CAC, the digit translation is ignoring this part of the dialing information but also any priority CAC of this subscriber. Advantage: It is not necessary to create for all destinations which can be reached via the own and foreign networks additionally to the CPT without CAC also a CPT starting with the own CAC.

��The ability to choose change the priority CAC via subscriber controlled input is created with SCIALLOW=YES.

Page 181: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

181

��DEFNA describes the information supply of the NADI (nature of address indicator) in the ISUP.

The default setting is DEFNA=NONAI. This means that the traffic discrimination code (and not the CAC) defines the type of traffic (national or international traffic).

When a country decides that in case of CAC dialing the traffic discrimination code is dropped, the CAC itself is used to determine whether a call is national or international. In this case the DEFNA is set to NAT or INTNAT.

ENTR DNATT: PFXCAC= ;

CR CAC:

CARRIER= ,

CAC=,

[, EXCCACn=YES]

[, OWNCAC=YES, ROWNCAC=YES/NO]

[, SCIALLOW=YES]

[, DEFNA=];

Fig. 102

Page 182: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

182

8.4 CAC Administration on Subscriber Level

8.4.1 Allocation of One (or Two) Priority (Preselected) CAC to Subscribers

CR/MOD SUB: LAC=, DN= , ..,

COSDAT=

CAC1

[CAC2

<max. six digit cac>

<max. six digit cac>]

(&CACMOD) (only if subscribers can change the CAC per SCI)

A priority CAC can also be allocated to PBX, PBXLN and TGRP.

TIP

��In case of two preselected CAC it has to be administered in the exchange for which called party addresses which of the two preselected CACs has to be taken in consideration. The default value for all call set ups is CAC1.

��Example: If a subscriber dials a national number (starting with 0) his CAC1 should be used, if he dials an international number (starting with 00) his CAC2 should be used.

8.4.2 Blocking of CAC Dialing

It is also possible to define for all subscriber types (SUB, PBX, PBXLN) whether a carrier access code (CAC) may be dialed or not. This provides a solution for cases (e.g. calls from hotels) in which the dialing of a CAC by the subscriber is not desirable. The rejected calls are routed to an intercept.

Block CAC dialing:

CR SUB/PBX/PBXLN : LAC=

DN=

COS=INCACD

Create associated intercept:

CR INC: INCEPT=CACNAUTH

DEST=

Page 183: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

183

SIEMENS

Dials 08711.....

COSDAT=CAC1- 01070COSDAT=CAC2- 01071

Dials 0033 ....

CAC1 / 2 application in the exchange

CR CACCPT: CODE=0DEFCAC=CAC1

CR CACCPT: CODE=00DEFCAC=CAC2

Code 0->Routingwith 01070..

Code 00->Routingwith 01071..

Fig. 103

SIEMENS

EWSD LAC=089

Dials

010700711..

PBX

COS=INHCACD

Dials

010700711..

Call set up

Call is rejected ->

CACNAUTH

Fig. 104

Page 184: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

184

D

8.5 Application of the CAC in the Digit Translation

8.5.1 Functionality of the Carrier Data Table CARDA

Following the deregulation of the market, it became clear that carrier-dependent routing for specific code points had to be avoided. Prime examples of this are service numbers (e.g. 0130), emergency calls (e.g. 110) or SCI (subscriber-controlled input) services that are always routed to the service platform of the local service provider, even if a carrier code point is dialed.

Destinations in the local area are also affected, since the dialed carrier digits had to be truncated because a partially extremely awkward routing via one carrier makes little sense in terms of the cost and the call processing expense.

To keep these problems under control, and to have more flexible handling of code points with carrier routing in the future, these code points are administered in a special translator database CARDA using the MML command CR CACCPT.

For each call set up the CARDA is always accessed prior to the digit translator. The CARDA is entered with the called party address excluding any dialed or preselected CAC.

Depending on the creation data in this table (different results are also possible for dialed and preselected CACs) the CdPA of a call may be

��forwarded to the digit translator with taking a dialed or preselected CAC (if available) in consideration. (CARDA result: ROUTE, i.e. use CAC, if available, for routing. This is the default value, assigned to all called party addresses automatically if no CACCPT was created for them.).

��routed to an intercept code if a CAC was dialed or preselected. (CARDA result: INCEPT)

��forwarded to the digit translator without taking a dialed or preselected carrier access code in consideration. (CARDA result: IGNORE, i.e. don't use a dialed or preselected CAC for routing of the call)

TIP

The evaluation result of the dialed digits can be valid on a global scale, i.e. the same result for all CACs or different results depending on the CAC (selective).

Page 185: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

185

Call set up

with CAC dialing

or

preselected CAC

or

without CAC

CdPA of the call set up excluding any CAC

Possible CARDA results:

•INCEPT

•ROUTE (default value)

•IGNORE

CARDA

Normal digit translation

according to the created CPTs

Digit Translator DITDA

Complete CdPA

including dialed or

preselected CAC

(if available)

CdPA

without dialed or

preselected CAC

intercept handling

(INCEP=CACNEXEC)

Fig. 105

Page 186: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

186

8.5.1.1 Creating CACCPT with Global Results

CACCPTs have only to be created for destinations, for which a dialed and / or preselected CAC should not be used for the normal digit translation.

These destinations are defined in the context with the dialed called party number (parameter code) and, if specified, information about the origin of the call (parameter LACOR or ORIG1).

Explanation of the parameter values:

��CODE

The parameter CODE used here is totally independent of the parameter CODE used in the command CR CPT.

The chain of digits entered in the parameter code may not be a CAC.

��LACOR

The LACOR designates the LAC of the calling party.

��ORIG1

The identifier DEF may not be input.

If one of the actions IGNORE, INCEPT or ROUTE is valid for all CACs, all dialed CACs or all preselected CACs , the following parameters must be used in the command CR CACCPT:

��CACGHUC (global handling for dialed and preselected carrier access codes),

��CACGHDI (global handling of dialed carrier access codes) and

��CACGHPS (global handling of preselected carrier access codes).

TIP

Ambiguous digit combinations can be created:

Example: dialed or preselected CACs should be ignored for calls with a called party starting with 0130 except the called party has the value 01308888

CR CACCPT: CODE=0130, CACGHUC=IGNORE;

CR CACCPT: CODE=01308888, CACGHUC=ROUTE;

Page 187: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

187

Administration of CAC handling for certain destinations (CARDA)

CR CACCPT: CODE=

LACOR=

ORIG1=

CACGHUC=IGNORE/INCEPT/ROUTE

CACGHDI=IGNORE/INCEPT/ROUTE

CACGHPS=IGNORE/INCEPT/ROUTE

Create the intercept

CR INC: INCEPT=CACNEXEC, ....;

Fig. 106

SIEMENS

EWSD LAC=089

Routing without

CAC

Routing with CAC

Routing without

CAC

Police

dials

CAC+110

dials

CAC+471122

dials

CAC+088...

CR CACCPT: CODE = 11

CACGHUC= IGNORE;

CR CACCPT: CODE = 4

CACGHUC= IGNORE;

Subscriber with

DN 471122 in

same local area

National call to

destination area

088 via the

selected carrier

Fig. 107

Page 188: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

188

8.5.1.2 Creating CACCPT with Special Results

In opposite to the CACCPT with global results, i.e. with a standard handling of all dialed and / or preselected CAC it is also possible to define for a CACCPT a so called CAC specific handling. This means, that for these CODEs the result of the CARDA depends on the value of the dialed and / or preselected CAC.

Creating CAC lists

The command CR CACLST can be used to administer a list of 32 carrier access codes and define the handling of these carrier access codes (IGNORE, ROUTE (default) or INCEPT).

Note: The MOD CACLST command can be used to extend this list to up to 255 entries for each exchange. The CACs added to an existing CAC list may get assigned a different type of handling than the one defined in the CR CACLST command.

Assigning a CAC list to a CACCPT

A CAC list is assigned to a CODE of the CARDA by using following command:

CR CACCPT: CODE=, LACOR=, ORIG1=,

{CACSHUC= | CACSHDI =| CACSHPS=},

The parameters

��CACSHUC (special handling of dialed and preselected carrier access codes),

��CACSHDI (special handling of dialed carrier access codes) and

��CACSHPS (special handling of preselected carrier access codes)

are used to define the name of the CAC list assigned to this CODE.

Page 189: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

189

SIEMENS

EWSD LAC=089

Routing with CAC

Routing without

CAC

Routing without

CACdials

cacx+0800

dials

cacy +0800

dials

cacz +0800

CR CACLST: NAME = name1

CAC = cacx&cacz

ACTION = IGNORE;

CR CACCPT: CODE = 0800

CACSHDI = name1;

Fig. 108

Set the routing for certain destinations

CR CACCPT: CODE=

LACOR=

ORIG1=

CACSHUC= <name of a list>

CACSHDI= <name of a list>

CACSHPS= <name of a list>

Create / modify a CAC list

CR CACLST: NAME=<name>

CAC= 32 CACs can be linked in one command

ACTION=IGNORE/INCEPT/ROUTE

MOD CACLST NAME=

CAC=

ACTION=

Fig. 109

Page 190: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

190

Further examples:

CR CACCPT: CODE=0800,CACGHDI=INCEPT,CACGHPS=IGNORE;

If a CAC and a no charge number (0800xxxx) aredialed, this call is routed to the interceptCACNEXEC and all preselected CACs areignored.

CR CACCPT: CODE=0800,CACGHPS=IGNORE; The preselected (default CAC) is ignored forrouting to the no charge number.

CR CACLST: NAME=<name1>,CAC=01050&01090, ACTION=INCEPT; andCR CACCPT: CODE=089,CACSHDI=<name1>,CACGHPS=IGNORE;

When dialing the CACs 01050 or 01090 and anumber with 089xxxx, the call is routed to theintercept CACNEXEC and all preselected CACsare ignored.

CR CACCPT: CODE=1,CACGHUC=IGNORE; All dialed and preselected CACs for numbers thatbegin with '1’ (e.g. 110, 112) are ignored.

CR CACCPT: CODE=2,CACGHPS=IGNORE; Only the default CACs for routing to destinationswhose numbers begin with ‘2’ are ignored.

Fig. 110

Page 191: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

191

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CR CACLST: NAME=<name2>,CAC=01070,ACTION=IGNORE; andCR CACCPT: CODE=0881,LACOR=089,CACSHUC=<name2>;

CAC 01070 is ignored for routing to 0881xxx forcalls from 089xxx, regardless of whether it waspreselected or dialed.

CR CACCPT:CODE=088122,CACGHUC=IGNORE;

All dialed or preselected CACs for routing to thedestination 088122 are ignored, regardless of theorigin of the call.

CR CACCPT: CODE=001,CACSHDI=<name2>; Ignores CAC 01070 for routing to 001 only if theCAC was dialed

CR CACCPT:CODE=00122,CACGHUC=ROUTE;

All dialed and preselected CACs for routing to thedestination ‘00122’ are used, even CAC 01070.

Fig. 111

Page 192: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

192

8.5.2 Administration of Code Points in Deregulated Networks

��Code points for destinations without CAC evaluation

These CPT are set up without using CAC digit chains in the CODE parameter: CR CPT: CODE=<part of the called number>, DEST= ABC;

��Code points for destinations with CAC evaluation

If a destination XYZ can be reached through CARRIER1 (own network) and through CARRIER2 (foreign network) are set up as follows: CR CPT: CODE=<CAC1 + part of the called number>, DEST=XYZ1; CR CPT: CODE=<CAC2 + part of the called number>, DEST=XYZ2;

The routing table connected with the destination XYZ1 contains trunk groups that lead to the network of CARRIER1, while the routing table connected with the destination XYZ2 contains trunk groups that lead to the network of CARRIER2.

Page 193: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

193

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Code Points without CAC evaluation (CODE does not include a CAC)

CRCPT: CODE= , TRATYP=CPTDN;CRCPT: CODE= , DEST =<exchange in same local area>;CRCPT: CODE=112, DEST = <emergency number>;

These CPT can only be accessed if thedigit translator is entered with a CdPAnot starting with a CAC

Code Points with CODE including a CAC

CRCPT:CODE= <CAC +....>,DEST = <dest. with carrier specific routing table>;

These CPT can only be accessed if the digit translator is entered

with a CdPA starting with a CAC:

� the subscriber has dialed a CAC (call by call, CAC evaluation

in local exchange)

� the ISUP-IAM includes a CAC in the TNSC or CdPA parameter

(CAC evaluation in higher ranking exchange)

� the originator of the call (subscriber or inc. TGRP) apreselected CAC is assigned to

Fig. 112

Page 194: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

194

8.6 Example

Database in the subscriber exchange Augsburg for calls to Munich and Stuttgart via the own network and the transit network of carrier CARB

��ENTR DNATT: PFXCAC=010;

��CR CAC: CARRIER=CARA, CAC=01022, EXCCAC=NO, OWNCAC=YES, ROWNCAC=YES; CR CAC: CARRIER=CARB, CAC=01033, EXCCAC=NO, OWNCAC=NO;

��CR DEST: DEST=MÜNCH; CR DEST: DEST=STUTT; CR DEST: DEST=CARB;

ROUTE1: TGNO=BWM ROUTE1: TGNO=BWS ROUTE1: TGNO=BWCARB

��CR CPT: DEST=MUNCH, CODE=089; (CR CPT: DEST=MUNCH, CODE=01022089; not necessary because own CAC 01022 is not used for digit translation)

��CRCPT: DEST=STUTT, CODE=0711; (CRCPT: DEST=STUTT, CODE=010220711; not necessary because own CAC 01022 is not used for digit translation)

��CRCPT: DEST=CARB, CODE=01033;

��(CRCACCPT: CODE=0, CACGHUC=ROUTE;

not necessary because ROUTE is the default value)

Fig. 113

TIP If a subscriber should be able to dial the OWNCAC (e.g. in order to overwrite his preselected CAC), one CPT including the OWNCAC has to be created in the exchange.

Reason: The LTG digit pre-translation accepts only dialing information, for which at least one CPT is created.

Page 195: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

195

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CAR A

Local network, Augsburg Local network, Munich 089

CAR B

CAR A

Long distance network

CAR A

CAR B

CAR A

CAR B

A-side

CAR A

Local network, Stutgart 0711

CAR A

CAR B

TGNO=

BWM

TGNO=

BWCARB

TGNO=

BWS

CAR xExchange of

operator CAR x

Fig. 114

Page 196: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

196

TIP Effects on various functions

��individual subscriber screening (connection specific blockage of up to 50 directory numbers) is possible regardless of the carrier, i.e. disabled subscriber directory numbers can be entered with and without CAC .

Input without CAC: directory numbers disabled for all carriers in general

Input with CAC: directory numbers disabled only for the specified carrier

��the CAC is not taken into account when determining the traffic type (TRAT) of a connection

��digit conversion of the routing paths does not affect the carrier codes

��the originally selected CAC of new code destinations is replaced if the first numbers of the new code correspond to an established CAC, otherwise the original CAC remains valid and the new code replaces the B-directory number only

��start sending digits (SSDI) affects only the destination directory number, the CAC remains unaffected (not relevant for ISUP)

��the handling of emergency calls or special services (information) for dialing with and without carrier codes can be determined in the data base (CR CACCPT)

��CR TGRP: ..., OPMODE=BW, GCOS=CACTNSC GCOS=CACTNSC defines that the CAC is carried in the TNSC field (transit network selection code) of the ISUP. If this GCOS value is missing, then the CAC is transported as part of the CdPA. CACTNSC can only be entered for ISUP trunk groups with OPMODE=BW.

��CR TGRP: ..., GCOS=RCACINC or RCACOUT The two identifiers suppress the further internal processing of a received own CAC or the further signaling of the evaluated own CAC (entered with CR CAC: CAC=..., OWNCAC=YES). The type of signaling does not matter. The following is valid:

GCOS=RCACINC (only for incoming and bothway TGRPs) suppresses the incoming own network CAC

GCOS=RCACOUT (for outgoing and bothway TGRPs) suppresses the sending of the own network carrier access code

This same trunk group data can be administered via ENTR TGDAT.

Page 197: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

197

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page 198: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

198

Page 199: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

199

9 Flexible Routing via PA

Page 200: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

200

It is possible to use a PA as a route to a destination at any position of the assigned routing list. I.e. all above that

��a routing list of a destination can contain different PA-routes (addressed by their PDN)

��PA-routes and trunk group-routes can be mixed inside one routing list

With this solution almost all existing routing features are available for calls to private networks. Of course this is only useful if a private network is connected to the public network via different PA interfaces (and additionally by trunk interfaces).

The figure shows an interconnection between the public network and a private PBX network utilizing the concept of flexible routing. Here a call of the A - subscriber can be routed in the public node A via different routes to the terminating private node PBX B. The routes can be PA or TGNO routes.

Page 201: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

201

node A

(EWSD)Trem.

PBX B

Route:TGNO

Route: PA

private

network

Sub A

public

network

transit-

node C:

(EWSD)

Transit

PBX E

Route: PA

Transit

PBX D

Routing list in node A for calls to PBX B:

1. Use the PA between the node A and the PBX B as the first choice route (PA-route)

2. Use the PA between the node A and transit-PBX E as first overflow route (PA-route). The transit-PBX E then routes the call inside the private network to the terminating PBX B.

3. Use the trunk group TGNO between node A and node C as second

overflow route (TGNO-route). Node C routes the call to the transit-PBX D which then routes the call inside the private network to the terminating PBX B.

Trem.

PBX

Trem.

PBX

Fig. 115

TIP The flexible routing, i.e., the utilization of routing lists which contain PAs and trunk groups, is especially important for the interconnection of new network operators to the incumbent telecom operators.

Page 202: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

202

The Parameter CODE in the CR ROUTE Command

The new parameter CODE is added to the CR ROUTE command:

��The syntax of the new parameter CODE is the same like the syntax of the already existing parameters DICON or CONVCODE

��The function of the new parameter CODE is similar to the function of the destination parameter CONVCODE, i.e., both initiate a digit conversion and lead to renewed digit translation. But in opposite to CONVCODE the new CODE parameter is route and not destination specific. Additionally also the LAC part of a received CdPA can be changed with CODE (what is not possible with CONVCODE or DICON.

The code conversion because of the new parameter CODE may put digits before the dialed number and/or replace digits of the translated part of the dialed number. The user has to take care that not translated B-digits will not be changed. These new B-digits will be translated at the Digit Translation Database (DITDA) once more into an index, that should point at the PBX-Database.

After the second Digit Translation the Call Processing checks, if the result really refers to a PBX-PDN (such a check is not performed when a ROUTE with CODE is created). If the CODE doesn’t belong to a PBX or if the PBX has no idle PBXLN, an overflow to the next route is performed.

Charging is only possible for the dialed (original) number.

Seizing of a PBXLN via a CPT linked with a DEST (PA – Route)

Each kind of Routing (classic for TGNOs or the new flexible one for PBXs too) starts at the Digit Translation Table (DITDA), where the dialed or received number is related to a destination of the destination database (DEADA) to classify the outgoing traffic.

Besides the typical distribution to different trunk groups by the maximum of 16 routes, the classic Routing already offered the possibility of a Final Overflow Code (FOVCODE), which directs the call via a Codeprocessing Database (COPDA) and a second digit translation at this same switch to another destination for outgoing traffic, to an intercept handling or to all kinds of terminating traffic.

Now the flexible routing will offer approximately the same functionality like FOVCODE to each route, i.e., a CODE can be assigned in the Route Database (ROSDA) to any Route as an alternative to a TGNO. But in opposite to FOVCODE the result of the second digit translation because of a CODE assigned to a Route must not be another destination.

Page 203: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

203

CR ROUTE : DEST= ,ROUTE= ,CODE= [,DINO=] [,LNDES=]

[,DICON=] [,NEWCAC=] [,STAT=] [,SSDI=] [,EOS=];

CODE FOR PBX

This parameter specifies a conversion mask to change the dialed digits into a code, which

addresses a PBX (CR PBX) for a more flexible routing.

Attention:

This parameter might also result in other objects than a PBX. In this case an overflow to the next

existing route is done.

Valid input characteres: 0-9, A-F, #, *, +, ., X

The modifications are specified in the form of a mask consisting of control characters and digits.

The control characters have the following significance:

X : The digit of the old code is left as it is.

. : The digit of the old code is deleted.

+ : The digits following this character, up to the next control character, are inserted.

0-9: Digits without a preceeding "+" replace the old code.

Example:

CODE = 123xx. specifies that the first 3 digits of the existing dial information are replaced by 1 2

3, the next 2 digits remain and the 6th digit is omitted.

The existing dial information 7944583 is changed to 123453.

Fig. 116

PBXLN

DEADA DITDA ROSDA

CPT-1

Dest-IdxStdDest-1

Route

Tgrp-Idx

DBDNB/T

Route1

Route2

:

Route16

Fovcode

ROJDA

Route

switch job

CPT-2

(CPTDN)

PBX

Route

Code-Idx

COPDA

Code

processingStdDest-2

DBTGR

Trunk

group

outgoingtraffic

treminating

traffic

only possible with FOVCODE parameter

utilization of new route specific CODE parameter

second digit translation

continue with next route if no PBX line is idle

or if CODE does not result in a PDN

Fig. 117

Page 204: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

204

Example: Routing Database for Flexible Routing to a Private Network

In this example flexible routing to the private network XYZ is shown.

Database in EWSD (node A):

��PBX E with PDN= 089 999 accessed via CPTDN with CODE=999 and LAC=089

��DEST=XYZ (destination for the private network XYZ) accessed via CPT with CODE=990 and LAC=089

Database in EWSD (node C):

��PBX with PDN=089 998 accessed via CPTDN with CODE=998 and LAC=089

Routing to private network XYZ in EWSD (node A)

��ROUTE 1: PA of PBX with PDN 089 999

The first ROUTE of DEST=XYZ is created in the following way: CR ROUTE: DEST=XYZ, ROUTE=1, CODE=xxxxx9;

In case of a dialed CdPA 089 990 41429 the Digit Translation in node A results in the DEST=XYZ. When the routing process selects the first route, the original CdPA 089 990 41429 is converted into 089 999 41429 and the digit translation is started again. The second digit translation results in the PDN 089 999. Now the call is forwarded to the PBX E. If no PBX line is idle, the CP continues with the routing (looking for next alternative route (ROUTE=2).

��ROUTE 2: Trunk group TGNO to node C

The second ROUTE of DEST=XYZ is created in the following way: CR ROUTE: DEST=XYZ, ROUTE=2, TGNO=<trunk group to node C>;

When the routing process selects the second route, the original CdPA 089 990 41429 is forwarded unchanged to the public node C. It is than the task of the node C to convert the received CdPA into the PDN of the PBX D (PDN= 089 998). I.e., in node C has to be created a CPT= 089 998 with a DEST containing a ROUTE with CODE=xxxxx8 .

Page 205: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

205

node A

(EWSD)Trem.

PBX B

Route:TGNO

Route:

PAof PBX with

PDN= 089 999

private

network

XYZ

Sub A

public

network

transit-

node C:

(EWSD)

Transit

PBX E

Transit

PBX D

Trem.

PBX

Trem.

PBX

• Public subscribers access the private network XYZ by access code 089 990

• Routes to the private network XYZ created in node A:

- ROUTE1 with CODE=xxxxx9

- ROUTE2 with TGNO (trunk group to node C)

089 990 41429

41429

PBX with

PDN=089 998

Fig. 118

TIP

��It is possible to enter route switches ROUTESW also for PA routes. Here PA routes to be activated are identified by the new parameter CTACT, PA routes to be blocked are identified by the new parameter CTBAR. Example: CR ROUTESW:DEST=XYZ,CTACT=xxxxx9,RTBAR=<tgno to node C>,TIME=06-00; CR ROUTESW:DEST=XYZ,CTBAR=xxxxx9,RTACT=<tgno to node C>,TIME=22-00;

��The parameter CODE is also available in following further routing commands: CR/INS ROUTE, CAN/TAKO ROUTE, MOD ROUTE, ACT/BAR ROUTE, DISP ROUTE

��With DISP ROUTE an output mask appears which contains all routes with parameter CODE.

Page 206: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

206

Interworking of the new CODE Parameter with other Routing Features

For all functions that deal with trunk groups at routes and especially for all route parameters it has to be made clear, if the routing to PA would mean identical, comparable, different or wrong functionality. Some of the necessary rejections will be made patchable to be able to meet updates in the future.

ROUTEPARAMETERS (in alphabetic order):

��DEST Different to trunk groups it is not checked, if a certain CODE exists only once within a destination, because this is quite an old strategy, which could cause not wanted limitations to the user. (The limitation for trunk groups can be avoided by using different trunk group clusters, which are allowed to contain the same trunk group.)

��DICON still needed for code processing at further nodes.

��DINO, EOS These parameters, which describe the number of needed digits and how the end of the dialed digits has to be recognized, are still necessary. The CODE to a PA is always totally existing, but the extension number might be received afterwards. The according DINO parameter of the PBX is overruled.

��LNDES This parameter consists of a set of line descriptions, which are already restricted for the different routing objects. For PA routes following set values are rejected by an incompatibility mask because all these are B-side orientated on trunk groups: CLEARBA, METOTR, SUPMET, TRMET, TRMETSUB, CUS1DIG, CUS2DIG, CUS3DIG, CUS4DIG, CREACUS, REACUS, OECNEXTE, SYNC1, SYNC2, DIRECT

��MINMAX This destination parameter is evaluated for PA routes too and overrules the according parameters of the PBX.

��NEWCAC eventually still needed at further nodes.

��ODR Not implemented at least in this version and explicitly rejected.

�� SSDI This parameter of the route, which defines how many leading digits are not to be sent, is to be used and overrules the one of the PBX.

Page 207: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

207

��TGNO This parameter is not to be used together with the new parameter CODE (the combination is explicitly rejected).

��TLIM This destination parameter activates or deactivates different timers and is evaluated for PA routes too and overrules the time limits of the PBX.

��TRACA This parameter consists of a set of traffic categories and is explicitly rejected for PA routes, because all of them are only relevant for outgoing traffic by trunk groups.

��ZDIG not needed and explicitly rejected for PA routes, because this language identification belongs to a trunk group, which should lead to an operator.

ROUTING FUNCTIONS (in alphabetic order) :

��Carrier quotation supported for PA routes within Carrier destinations. All three quotation procedures are possible without additional adaptations.

��Route threshold This function is reserved for trunk groups. No rejection is necessary since the Route threshold counter is only usable for TGNOs.

��TMR IPI According to the required transmission medium and the call history the TMR-IPI destination (without any routes) leads to intercepts or the so called TIR-Destination, which might consist of PA routes too; no additional adaptations necessary.

��Trunk group cluster PA routes within a cluster to achieve e.g. proportional bidding are not to be implemented at least in this version. No rejection necessary, because the cluster already has only allowed trunk groups as elements so far.

��Trunk reservation only relevant for trunk groups.

Page 208: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

208

Page 209: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

209

10 Administration of Announcement Groups and Lines

Page 210: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

210

10.1 Function

Like for the standard routing, announcements are reached via the digit translator, destination and route. The announcement is reached via an announcement group instead of via a trunk group and via an announcement line instead of a trunk.

I.e. the announcement line represents the time slot on a PCM carrier to the DAS or on a LTG internal highway to the OCANEQ. The announcement group is an admini-strative collection of the announcement lines.

Page 211: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

211

Announcement groupAnnouncement group

RouteRoute

Announcement lineAnnouncement line

Announcement lineAnnouncement line

Announcement lineAnnouncement line

Fig. 119 Announcement structure

Page 212: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

212

10.2 Access to an Announcement Unit

Announcements can be accessed via integrated devices such as the OCANEQ (operationally controlled announcement equipment) or via external equipment such as the DAS ATIS.

Standard and individual announcements can be accessed via the OCANEQ, the DAS can only be accessed for standard announcements. Standard announcements are announcements with a fixed text. Individual announcements are announcements with fixed and individual text. Individual text can for instance contain subscriber-specific text such as account statements, telephone numbers, feature information etc.

Accessing the DAS and the OCANEQ differs for standard announcements and individual announcement.

10.2.1 Accessing a DAS

The DAS is linked via a PCM link. Each time slot on the PCM represents a particular text on the DAS. In other words, to obtain a certain text you need to select a certain announcement line. As an announcement line cannot be accessed by several an-nouncement groups the whole path through the routing database from the code point to the time slot is individual for each text. In other words, a whole path through the database needs to be set up for each text, i.e. announcement.

TIP If a speech announcement is listened very frequently, you have to create several announcement lines for one announcement group. All lines (PCM times slots) access DAS modules where the same text is stored.

Page 213: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

213

313210

DAS

PCM

Codepoint

Destination

Route

Codepoint

Destination

Route

Announcement

group(announcement

specific)

Announcement

group(announcement

specific)

Announcement

line(announcement

specific)

Announcement

line(announcement

specific)

Codepoint

Destination

Route

Codepoint

Destination

Route

Announcement

group(announcement

specific)

Announcement

group(announcement

specific)

Announcement

line(announcement

specific)

Announcement

line(announcement

specific)

A001 A002

Fig. 120 Accessing a DAS

Page 214: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

214

10.2.2 Accessing the OCANEQ for Standard Announcements

The OCANEQ is integrated in the LTG and is in the LTU position 1. Each time slot on the LTG internal 2Mbit highway or LTU port can basically be used for any standard announcement. Because the information on what announcement is played is allocated to the announcement group and an announcement line cannot be accessed by several announcement groups, in this case an LTU port is also allocated to one standard announcement. Thus here the whole path through the routing database from the code point to the LTU port is also individual for each text or standard announcement. In other words a total path through the database needs to be set up for each announcement.

Page 215: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

215

313210

OCANEQ

LTG internal

highway

Codepoint

Destination

Route

Codepoint

Destination

Route

Announcement

groupSTANNO=n

Announcement

groupSTANNO=n

Announcement

line(announcement

specific)

Announcement

line(announcement

specific)

Codepoint

Destination

Route

Codepoint

Destination

Route

Announcement

groupSTANNO=m

Announcement

groupSTANNO=m

Announcement

line(announcement

specific)

Announcement

line(announcement

specific)

A001 A002

Fig. 121 Accessing OCANEQ for standard announcements

Page 216: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

216

10.2.3 Accessing the OCANEQ for Individual Announcements

The OCANEQ is integrated in the LTG and is in the LTU position 1. Each time slot on the LTG internal 2 Mbit highway or LTU port can be used for any individual announcement (so-called phrase). The information concerning which announcement is played with which variable parts is controlled via the INDAS software (individual announcement system) and passed on to the OCANEQ. Therefore the total path through the routing database from the code point to the LTU port is not announce-ment-specific but can be used for all individual announcements equally.

Page 217: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

217

313210

OCANEQ

LTG internal

highway

controlled by

INDAS SW

Codepoint

Destination

Route

Codepoint

Destination

Route

Announcement

line

Announcement

lineAnnouncement

line

Announcement

line

DEF0

Announcement group(for all individual announcements)

Announcement group(for all individual announcements)

Fig. 122 Accessing OCANEQ for individual announcements

Page 218: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

218

10.3 MML Commands

10.3.1 Announcement Group

An announcement group is administered via the command CR ANGRP. An announce-ment group is addressed via a trunk group number and can also be allocated to a des-tination area via CR ROUTE.

��The parameter GCOS specifies general properties of the announcement group:

Enter OCANEQ if the announcement group leads to an OCANEQ.

Enter CHARGABL if the call to an announcement is zoned. In other words, if an

announcement is accessed directly billing is carried out in the zoning according to the translated CODE and if it is accessed via INCEPT it is billed according to the

original dialed CODE.

For DAS call connections in which several subscribers can listen to an announcement (broadcast) the values NONBARGE and STAGGER control the

beginning of the announcement for a second, third subscriber etc. NONBARGE

means that a further person hears the announcement from the beginning, STAGGER means that the beginning of the announcements that come from several

announcement lines with the same text is evenly distributed over the entire duration of the announcement. This reduces the waiting time when NONBARGE is set.

��The parameter STANNO specifies the number of the standard announcements that

is to be played from OCANEQ. Take the standard announcement number from the

respective project-specific INDAS catalogue.

��The parameter NUMCYC specifies how often a subscriber may listen to the an-

nouncement. You cannot combine this specification with the broadcast mode.

��The parameter SIT specifies that a project-specific information tone is to be

played before an OCANEQ announcement.

Page 219: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

219

Announcement Group Administration

CR ANGRP: TGNO= [,GCOS=] [,BLK=] [,STANNO=] [,NUMCYC=][,SIT=];

CAN ANGRP: TGNO=;

DISP ANGRP: TGNO=;

Fig. 123 Announcement group administration

2. line

10s

1. line

announcement duration

3. line

announcement duration4. line

GCOS= NONBARGE

announcement duration

0s 2,5s 5,0s 7,5s 10s

1. line

announcement duration

0s 2,5s 5,0s 7,5s 10s

2. line

announcement duration

0s 2,5s 5,0s 7,5s 10s

3. line

announcement duration

0s 2,5s 5,0s 7,5s 10s

4. line

GCOS= NONBARGE&STAGGER

10s

10s

10s

announcement duration

announcement duration

announcement duration

Fig. 124 GCOS = NONBARGE & STAGGER

Page 220: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

220

10.3.2 Announcement Line

The announcement line assigns an LTU port to an announcement group, in order to access a PCM time slot to a DAS or an OCANEQ port.

��The parameter TGNO is used to perform the allocation to the ANGRP.

��The optional parameter LNO (Line Number) specifies the position in the seizure sequence. If this parameter is not set the number is issued by the system itself.

��The EQN (Equipment Number) indicates the PCM port or OCANEQ port.

��The optional parameter LCOS only needs to be set if a so-called user interaction port (UI Port) is accessed or if neither the OCANEQ nor a DAS ATIS is accessed. A UI port is needed for Intelligent Network for instance, when communicating with the subscriber. In this case only as many OCANEQ ports can be seized as pushbutton code receiver circuits (module CRP8) or voice recognition circuits (module SCR) are available in the LTG.

��The parameter SEIZMX (1...16) is only permitted for non-OCANEQ ports and specifies how many subscribers may listen to an announcement simultaneously (broadcast). The duplication takes place in the switching network. The limitation is necessary to avoid a blocking of the time stage module.

Page 221: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

221

Announcement Line Administration

CR ANLN: TGNO= ,EQN= [,LNO=] [,LCOS=] [,BLK=][,SEIZMX=];

CAN ANLN: TGNO= [,LNO=];

DISP ANLN: TGNO= [,LNO=];

Fig. 125 MML commands for announcement lines

SNTSG

TSM

Circuit 0

Circuit 1

TSG

TSM

LTG

LTG

LTG

LTG

TSM

SDC

DAS

30 Ports (TS) / PDC

SEIZMX = 16

16 X 30 = 480 TS

DANGER:

480 of the max. 512 timslots

throughconnected in a TSM

may be seized by the DAS

PDC

Fig. 126 SEIZMX parameter

Page 222: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

222

Page 223: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

223

11 Testing of the Basic Routing Function

Page 224: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

224

It is difficult to localize database errors for routing administration. The database had to be displayed separately with several commands. Operating personnel had to establish the relation between the individual outputs on their own.

With the feature TEST ROUDB a much more comfortable method of database testing is available. It is possible to specify via the command TEST ROUDB the call coming into an exchange: the originator of the call (subscriber, trunk line or PABX) and the called party number is entered together with additional call data such as language digit, route type, TMR-IPI and catastrophe immunity.

The relevant zone number, destination, routes and trunk groups determined by the exchange for this call set up are obtained as a result.

The database is tested mainly by means of those functions also employed by the normal call processing programs. If the test is terminated (e.g. no CPT, ZOPT), then the reason for the error is printed out.

TIP

��Incoming port blocking is not taken into consideration.

��Traffic restrictions and toll catastrophe are incorporated in the routing test.

��Time-dependent data such as route changeovers are not printed.

��If a renewed call control (destination with NEWCODE / CONVCODE or intercept with new code) takes place in the course of call processing, the new directory number handling is also printed.

Page 225: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

225

SIEMENS SIEMENS

PBX

SIEMENS SIEMENS

PBX

Switching Center

subscriber

CODE

ZDIG

TMRIPI

........

Routing

Database

SIEMENS

NIXDORF

SIEMENS SIEMENS

SIEMENS

NIXDORF

TGNO

ZONO

........

Switching Center

Other results

(e.g. CPTDN)

Trunk

group

Fig. 127 Routing database functions test

Page 226: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

226

MML Command

The TEST ROUDB command has 5 input variants, as well as the optional parameters LACOR, CAT, ZDIG, ROUTYP, TMRIPI, CALLFEAT, ORIGCODE, TMQ, CAC, CUSTID, FEATURE, CALLFEAT

Call coming in on TRGP with Called Party Number leading to a Subscriber of this Exchange(Terminating Traffic)

9845

TESTROUDB:CODE=091800280,TGNO=I1INT;

X544/CTYCPZ1V1150/P50/110 99-05-18 11:21:48

9845 CA EWSD0 2878/06891

TESTROUDB:CODE=091800280,TGNO=I1INT;

TEST ROUTING DB WITH ORIG1 : , ORIG2 : , CAT : SUBORD

CAC :

TRANS RESULT : CPTDN EVALDIGIT : 0918002

SDN : DESTDN :

NEW CODE :

RETRANS RESULT : EVALDIGIT :

OBJECT DEST ROUTE TGNO STATUS ZONO ZOCHA

-------- ------------+-----+-------- ---------+----+--------

CPT SIMEND

END JOB 9845

Call originated by a Subscriber a with Called Party Number leading to another Exchange(Outgoing Traffic)

9851

TESTROUDB:CODE=089,DN=800240,LAC=091,SERV=CMSPEECH;

X544/CTYCPZ1V1150/P50/110 99-05-18 11:21:57

9851 CA EWSD0 2878/06891

TESTROUDB:CODE=089,DN=800240,LAC=091,SERV=CMSPEECH;

TEST ROUTING DB WITH ORIG1 : , ORIG2 : , CAT : SUBORD

CAC :

TRANS RESULT : OUTGTRAF EVALDIGIT : 089

SDN : DESTDN :

NEW CODE :

RETRANS RESULT : EVALDIGIT :

OBJECT DEST ROUTE TGNO STATUS ZONO ZOCHA

-------- ------------+-----+-------- ---------+----+--------

SDEST 1INT

ROUTE 1INT 1

TGRP 1INT 1 O1INT SUCCESS 127 ZONINHI

END JOB 9851

Fig. 128

Page 227: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

227

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Input possibilities for TEST ROUDB

Choice a A - side via

via TGNO via LTG/LC via EQN via LSN via DN

CODE = , TGN0 = [, LN0 =] [, LACOR =] ...;

CODE = , LTG= , LC= [, LACOR =] ...;

CODE = , EQN = [,SERV =] [, LACOR =] ...;

CODE = , LSN = [,LAC =] [,SERV =] ...;

CODE = ,DN = [LAC =] [,OPMODE =][,LN0 =] [,SERV =] ...;

Fig. 129

Page 228: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

228

Page 229: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

229

12 Exercise

Page 230: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

230

Page 231: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

231

o

Exercise 1

Title: Destination areas

Objectives: The participant will be able to perform administration of destination areas.

Prerequisite: The destination area DEST has to be set up before

Task

Display the data for the destination area:...................................

Test

What is the ring time limit (in seconds) of this destination area?

.........................................................................

Page 232: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

232

Page 233: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

233

Exercise 2

Title: Destination area with optimized dynamic routing

Objectives: The participant will be able to perform administration for destination areas with optimized dynamic routing.

Prerequisite: ��ODR is generally active.

��The TGRP were set up in the following way.

CRTGRP:TGNO=U019F,OPMODE=BW,GCOS=ZON &CCS7IUP&PRIOPRE,ORIG1= 140,BLK=ADMIN;

CRTGRP:TGNO=U029F,OPMODE=BW,GCOS=ZON &CCS7IUP&PRIOPRE,ORIG1= 140,BLK=ADMIN;

CRTGRP:TGNO=U039F,OPMODE=BW,GCOS=ZON &CCS7IUP&PRIOPRE,ORIG1= 140,BLK=ADMIN;

Task

Set up the optimized dynamic routing as follows:

��ODR list with the name ODR <ODR9> and max. 4 routing attempts per list access (MAXATT).

��ODR routes with the trunk groups U019F and U029F in the ODR list

��Destination area with the name FKFT and ODR after 1. FAR route (trunk group U039F)

Activate the ODR list ODR9

(The required trunk groups already exist )

Test

What MML commands do you need?

.........................................................................

.........................................................................

.........................................................................

.........................................................................

.........................................................................

.........................................................................

Page 234: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

234

Page 235: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

235

Exercise 3

Title: Announcements and intercepts

Objectives: The participant will be able to perform administration of announcements and intercepts.

Prerequisite: DAS with announcement on time slot 2 must be available

Task

��The announcement of times slot 2 of the your DAS should be linked to the intercept UNOBDE1:

��The announcement listen in duration should be limited according to timer 27.

��The information tone NUTONE should be inserted for 2 s after the listen in duration to the announcement is exceeded.

��The announcement can be listened simultaneously by two subscribers only, barge in is not allowed.

Database parameter for the announcement connection:

��The DAS is connected to the LTG...-.... LTU...

��- Destination area for the announcement on time slot 2: A029

��- Announcement group for the announcement on time slot 2: A029

��- Code point for destination area A029: A029

Set up the corresponding intercept and the link to the DAS.

Test

What MML commands do you need?

.........................................................................

.........................................................................

.........................................................................

.........................................................................

.........................................................................

.........................................................................

.........................................................................

Page 236: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

236

Page 237: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

237

Exercise 4

Title: Administration of a Speech Network with ISUP

Objectives: The participant is able to create the database for a speech network with ISUP

Pre-requisite: The CCS7 signaling network is already created

Task

Create the shown speech network.

LX622

SPC=0-5-0

NETIND=INAT0

LX622

SPC=0-5-0

NETIND=INAT0

TAC4

SPC=0-5-2

NETIND=INAT0

TAC4

SPC=0-5-2

NETIND=INAT0

LX566

SPC=0-5-1

NETIND=INAT0

LX566

SPC=0-5-1

NETIND=INAT0

Fig. 130

Data of LX622 Data of LX566 Data of TAC4

Connection to LX566

CPT: Code=566

Dest=x566

TGNO=x566s

TRRANGE=3

LTG=0-3, LC=2-17

Connection to LX622

CPT: Code=622

Dest=x622

TGNO=x622s

TRRANGE=3

LTG=0-3, LC=2-17

Connection to LX622

CPT: Code=622

Dest=x622

TGNO=x622s

TRRANGE=3

LTG=0-4, LC=2-17

Connection to TAC4

CPT: Code=444

Dest=TAC4

TGNO=TAC4s

TRRANGE=3

LTG=0-4, LC=2-17

Connection to TAC4

CPT: Code=444

Dest=TAC4

TGNO=TAC4s

TRRANGE=3

LTG=0-4, LC=2-17

Connection to LX566

CPT: Code=566

Dest=x566

TGNO=x566s

TRRANGE=3

LTG=0-3, LC=2-17

Page 238: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

238

Page 239: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

239

13 Solutions

Page 240: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

240

Page 241: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

241

Solution 1

Title: Destination areas

Objectives: The participant will be able to perform administration of destination areas.

Prerequisite: The destination area DEST was set up before.

Task

Display the data for the destination area: KASSEL

Test

2036

<DISPDEST:DEST=KASSEL;

MSC5/D2MMPK1V16180025/213 98-10-26 12:43:29

2036 OMT-00/REMOTE#1 2882/06379

DISPDEST:DEST=KASSEL;

DESTINATION NAMES AND STANDARD ROUTING PARAMETERS

TYP

DEST : MINMAX DEFEAT TLIM

--------------+-+------+---------+------------------------------

KASSEL 1-20 DIALTM1& RINGTM1& CLEATM1&

OFFCALL& RELTM3

END TEXT JOB 2036 EXEC'D

MSC5/D2MMPK1V16180025/213 98-10-26 12:43:30

2036 OMT-00/REMOTE#1 2882/08886

DISPDEST:DEST=KASSEL;

DESTINATIONS WITH OPTIMIZED DYNAMIC ROUTING LINKAGE

DEST ODR LINK

--------------+--------------+----

KASSEL BERLIN1 2

END JOB 2036 EXEC'D

Page 242: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

242

2062

<DISPTIOUT:TIMER=19;

MSC5/D2MMPK1V16180025/213 98-10-26 12:45:24

2062 OMT-00/REMOTE#1 2882/04161

DISPTIOUT:TIMER=19; EXEC'D

LIST OF TIMEOUTS

TIMER CURRENT VALUE MINIMUM VALUE MAXIMUM VALUE STEP

HH:MM:SS,MSEC HH:MM:SS,MSEC HH:MM:SS,MSEC HH:MM:SS,MSEC

------+---------------+---------------+---------------+----------------

19 00:02:00,000 00:00:00,400 00:30:00,000 00:00:00,100

END JOB 206

What is the ring time limit (in seconds) of this destination area?

120 s

Page 243: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

243

Solution 2

Title: Destination area with optimized dynamic routing

Objectives: The participant will be able to perform administration for destination areas with optimized dynamic routing.

Prerequisite: ��ODR is generally active.

��The TGRP were set up in the following way.

CRTGRP:TGNO=U019F,OPMODE=BW,GCOS=ZON &CCS7IUP&PRIOPRE,ORIG1= 140,BLK=ADMIN;

CRTGRP:TGNO=U029F,OPMODE=BW,GCOS=ZON &CCS7IUP&PRIOPRE,ORIG1= 140,BLK=ADMIN;

CRTGRP:TGNO=U039F,OPMODE=BW,GCOS=ZON &CCS7IUP&PRIOPRE,ORIG1= 140,BLK=ADMIN;

Task

Set up the optimized dynamic routing as follows:

��ODR list with the name ODR <ODR9> and max. 4 routing attempts per list access (MAXATT).

��ODR routes with the trunk groups U019F and U029F in the ODR list

��Destination area with the name FKFT and ODR after 1. FAR route (trunk group U039F)

Activate the ODR list ODR9

(The required trunk groups already exist )

Test

1365 <CR ODR:ODR=ODR9;

MSC5/D2MMPK1V16180024/003 98-02-20 12:34:131365 OMT-00/SIEMENS0 2878/00007

CRODR:ODR=ODR9; EXEC'D

END JOB 1365

Page 244: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

244

1377<DISP ODR:ODR=X;

MSC5/D2MMPK1V16180024/003 98-02-20 12:34:211377 OMT-00/SIEMENS0 2882/08885

DISPODR:ODR=X;

ODR GLOBAL : ACT REROUTING : YES

ODR MAXATT DACT--------------+-------+----ODR9 4 *

END JOB 1377 EXEC'D

1411<CR ROUTE:ODR=ODR9,TGNO=U019F,ROUTE=1;

MSC5/D2MMPK1V16180024/003 98-02-20 12:36:111411 OMT-00/SIEMENS0 2878/00007

CRROUTE:ODR=ODR9,TGNO=U019F,ROUTE=1; EXEC'D

END JOB 1411

1415<CR ROUTE:ODR=ODR9,TGNO=U029F,ROUTE=2;

MSC5/D2MMPK1V16180024/003 98-02-20 12:38:111415 OMT-00/SIEMENS0 2878/00007

CRROUTE:ODR=ODR9,TGNO=U029F,ROUTE=2; EXEC'D

END JOB 1415

1611<CR DEST:DEST=FKFT,ODR=ODR9,LINK=1;

MSC5/D2MMPK1V16180024/003 98-02-20 12:46:571611 OMT-00/SIEMENS0 2878/00007

CRDEST:DEST=FKFT,ODR=ODR9,LINK=1; EXEC'D

END JOB 1611

Page 245: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

245

1650<CR ROUTE:DEST=FKFT,TGNO=U039F,ROUTE=1;

MSC5/D2MMPK1V16180024/003 98-02-20 12:49:001650 OMT-00/SIEMENS0 2878/00007

CRROUTE:DEST=FKFT,TGNO=U039F,ROUTE=1; EXEC'D

END JOB 1650

1662<DISP DEST:DEST=FKFT;

MSC5/D2MMPK1V16180024/003 98-02-20 12:49:321662 OMT-00/SIEMENS0 2882/06379

DISPDEST:DEST=FKFT;

DESTINATION NAMES AND STANDARD ROUTING PARAMETERSTYP

DEST : MINMAX DEFEAT TLIM--------------+-+------+---------+------------------------------FKFT 1-20 DIALTM1& RINGTM1& CLEATM1&

OFFCALL& RELTM3END TEXT JOB 1662 EXEC'D

MSC5/D2MMPK1V16180024/003 98-02-20 12:49:331662 OMT-00/SIEMENS0 2882/08886

DISPDEST:DEST=FKFT;

DESTINATIONS WITH OPTIMIZED DYNAMIC ROUTING LINKAGE

DEST ODR LINK--------------+--------------+----FKFT ODR9 1

END JOB 1662 EXEC'D

1663

<ACT ODR:ODR=ODR9;

Page 246: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

246

Page 247: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

247

Solution 3

Title: Announcements and intercepts

Objectives: The participant will be able to perform administration of announcements and intercepts.

Prerequisite: DAS with announcement on time slot 2 must be available

Task

��The announcement of times slot 2 of the your DAS should be linked to the intercept UNOBDE1:

��The announcement listen in duration should be limited according to timer 27.

��The information tone NUTONE should be inserted for 2 s after the listen in duration to the announcement is exceeded.

��The announcement can be listened simultaneously by two subscribers only, barge in is not allowed.

Database parameter for the announcement connection:

��The DAS is connected to the LTG 0- 2, LTU 3

��- Destination area for the announcement on time slot 2: A029

��- Announcement group for the announcement on time slot 2: A029

��- Code point for destination area A029: A029

Set up the corresponding intercept and the link to the DAS.

Page 248: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

248

2273

<CRINC:INCEPT=UNOBDE1,INRES=NEWCOD,CODE=A029,SEQ=1;

MSC5/D2MMPK1V16180025/213 98-10-26 13:00:12

2273 OMT-00/REMOTE#1 2878/00007

CRINC:INCEPT=UNOBDE1,INRES=NEWCOD,CODE=A029,SEQ=1; EXEC'D

END JOB 2273

2274

<CRINC:INCEPT=UNOBDE1,TONE=NUTONE-2,SEQ=2;

MSC5/D2MMPK1V16180025/213 98-10-26 13:00:49

2274 OMT-00/REMOTE#1 2878/00007

CRINC:INCEPT=UNOBDE1,TONE=NUTONE-2,SEQ=2; EXEC'D

END JOB 2274

2287

<DISPLTU:LTG=X-X;

MSC5/D2MMPK1V16180025/213 98-10-26 13:01:09

2287 OMT-00/REMOTE#1 3102/01017

DISPLTU:LTG=X-X;

LTG LTU TYPE APPLIC MODVAR

-----+----+-----+-------+---------------------------------------

0- 2 0 D30 CCSCCS 0-1 & 1-1 & 2-1 & 3-1 & 4-1 & 5-1 & 6-1

0- 2 2 D30 CCSCCS 0-1 & 1-1 & 2-1 & 3-1 & 4-1 & 5-1 & 6-1

0- 2 3 D30 CASRCA 0-1 & 1-1 & 2-1 & 3-1 & 4-1 & 5-1 & 6-1

0- 3 0 D30 CCSCCS 0-1 & 1-1 & 2-1 & 3-1 & 4-1 & 5-1 & 6-1

0- 3 1 D30 CCSCCS 0-1 & 1-1 & 2-1 & 3-1 & 4-1 & 5-1 & 6-1

........

2330

<CRANGRP:TGNO=A029,GCOS=NONBARGE;

MSC5/D2MMPK1V16180025/213 98-10-26 13:02:52

2330 OMT-00/REMOTE#1 2878/00007

CRANGRP:TGNO=A029,GCOS=NONBARGE; EXEC'D

END JOB 2330

Page 249: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

249

2388

<CRANLN:TGNO=A029,EQN=0-2-3-29,SEIZMX=2;

MSC5/D2MMPK1V16180025/213 98-10-26 13:03:52

2388 OMT-00/REMOTE#1 2878/00007

CRANLN:TGNO=A029,EQN=0-2-3-29,SEIZMX=2; EXEC'D

END JOB 2388

2402

<DISPTIOUT:TIMER=27;

MSC5/D2MMPK1V16180025/213 98-10-26 13:04:24

2402 OMT-00/REMOTE#1 2882/04161

DISPTIOUT:TIMER=27; EXEC'D

LIST OF TIMEOUTS

TIMER CURRENT VALUE MINIMUM VALUE MAXIMUM VALUE STEP

HH:MM:SS,MSEC HH:MM:SS,MSEC HH:MM:SS,MSEC HH:MM:SS,MSEC

------+---------------+---------------+---------------+----------------

27 00:00:10,000 00:00:00,400 00:30:00,000 00:00:00,100

END JOB 2402

2426

<CRDEST:DEST=A029,TLIM=CONVTM1;

MSC5/D2MMPK1V16180025/213 98-10-26 13:06:07

2426 OMT-00/REMOTE#1 2878/00007

CRDEST:DEST=A029,TLIM=CONVTM1; EXEC'D

END JOB 2426

2433

<CRROUTE:DEST=A029,ROUTE=1,TGNO=A029;

MSC5/D2MMPK1V16180025/213 98-10-26 13:06:23

2433 OMT-00/REMOTE#1 2878/00007

CRROUTE:DEST=A029,TGNO=A029,ROUTE=1; EXEC'D

END JOB 2433

Page 250: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

250

2434

<CRCPT:CODE=A029,DEST=A029;

MSC5/D2MMPK1V16180025/213 98-10-26 13:06:56

2434 OMT-00/REMOTE#1 2878/00007

CRCPT:CODE=A029,DEST=A029; EXEC'D

END JOB 2434

Page 251: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

251

Solution 4

Title: Administration of a Speech Network with ISUP

Objectives: The participant is able to create the database for a speech network with ISUP

Pre-requisite: The CCS7 signaling network is already created

Task

Create the shown speech network.

LX622

SPC=0-5-0

NETIND=INAT0

LX622

SPC=0-5-0

NETIND=INAT0

TAC4

SPC=0-5-2

NETIND=INAT0

TAC4

SPC=0-5-2

NETIND=INAT0

LX566

SPC=0-5-1

NETIND=INAT0

LX566

SPC=0-5-1

NETIND=INAT0

Fig. 131

Data of LX622 Data of LX566 Data of TAC4

Connection to LX566

CPT: Code=566

Dest=x566

TGNO=x566s

TRRANGE=3

LTG=0-3, LC=2-17

Connection to LX622

CPT: Code=622

Dest=x622

TGNO=x622s

TRRANGE=3

LTG=0-3, LC=2-17

Connection to LX622

CPT: Code=622

Dest=x622

TGNO=x622s

TRRANGE=3

LTG=0-4, LC=2-17

Connection to TAC4

CPT: Code=444

Dest=TAC4

TGNO=TAC4s

TRRANGE=3

LTG=0-4, LC=2-17

Connection to TAC4

CPT: Code=444

Dest=TAC4

TGNO=TAC4s

TRRANGE=3

LTG=0-4, LC=2-17

Connection to LX566

CPT: Code=566

Dest=x566

TGNO=x566s

TRRANGE=3

LTG=0-3, LC=2-17

Page 252: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

252

Data in LX622 <CMDFILE;

<SETCFOPT:ACKCFS=ALL,DANCMD=EXEC,ACKREQ=POS;

<CRDEST:DEST=x566,MINMAX=5-20;

<CRTGRP:TGNO=x566S,OPMODE=BW,GCOS=CCS7IUP&PRIOPRE,SIGVAR=VAR1;

<CRROUTE:DEST=x566,TGNO=x566S,ROUTE=1,DICON=...+091,DINO=D5;

<CRCPT:CODE=566,DEST=x566;

<CRZOPT:CODE=566,ZONO=1,BILLING=AMA&METERING,SUCHCNTR=CNTR1&CNTR2;

<ENTRC7TGREL:TGNO=x566S,DPC=0-5-1,NETIND=INAT0;

<CRTRUNK:TGNO=x566S,LTG=0-3 ,LC=2-17,LCOS=DIGSIG12,CIC=1-17,TRRANGE=3;

<CANTRDAT:TGNO=x566S,CIC=1-17,BLK=ADMIN,TRRANGE=3;

/

<CRDEST:DEST=TAC4,MINMAX=5-20;

<CRTGRP:TGNO=TAC4S,OPMODE=BW,GCOS=CCS7IUP&PRIOPRE,SIGVAR=VAR1;

<CRROUTE:DEST=TAC4,TGNO=TAC4S,ROUTE=1,DICON=...+091,DINO=D5;

<CRCPT:CODE=444,DEST=TAC4;

<CRZOPT:CODE=444,ZONO=1,BILLING=AMA&METERING,SUCHCNTR=CNTR1&CNTR2;

<ENTRC7TGREL:TGNO=TAC4S,DPC=0-5-2,NETIND=INAT0;

<CRTRUNK:TGNO=TAC4S,LTG=0-4,LC=2-17,LCOS=DIGSIG12,CIC=2-17,TRRANGE=3;

<CANTRDAT:TGNO=TAC4S,CIC=2-17,BLK=ADMIN,TRRANGE=3;

<RSETCFOPT;

<ENDFILE;

Data in LX566 <CMDFILE;

<SETCFOPT:ACKCFS=ALL,DANCMD=EXEC,ACKREQ=POS;

<CRDEST:DEST=x622,MINMAX=5-20;

<CRTGRP:TGNO=x622S,OPMODE=BW,GCOS=CCS7IUP&PRIOPRE,SIGVAR=VAR1;

<CRROUTE:DEST=x622,TGNO=x622S,ROUTE=1,DICON=...+091,DINO=D5;

<CRCPT:CODE=622,DEST=x622;

<CRZOPT:CODE=622,ZONO=1,BILLING=AMA&METERING,SUCHCNTR=CNTR1&CNTR2;

<ENTRC7TGREL:TGNO=x622S,DPC=0-5-0,NETIND=INAT0;

<CRTRUNK:TGNO=x566S,LTG=0-3,LC=2-17,LCOS=DIGSIG12,CIC=1-17,TRRANGE=3;

<CANTRDAT:TGNO=x566S,CIC=1-17,BLK=ADMIN,TRRANGE=3;

/

<CRDEST:DEST=TAC4,MINMAX=5-20;

<CRTGRP:TGNO=TAC4S,OPMODE=BW,GCOS=CCS7IUP&PRIOPRE,SIGVAR=VAR1;

<CRROUTE:DEST=TAC4,TGNO=TAC4S,ROUTE=1,DICON=...+091,DINO=D5;

<CRCPT:CODE=444,DEST=TAC4;

<CRZOPT:CODE=444,ZONO=1,BILLING=AMA&METERING,SUCHCNTR=CNTR1&CNTR2;

<ENTRC7TGREL:TGNO=TAC4S,DPC=0-5-2,NETIND=INAT0;

<CRTRUNK:TGNO=TAC4S,LTG=0-4,LC=2-17,LCOS=DIGSIG12,CIC=3-17,TRRANGE=3;

<CANTRDAT:TGNO=TAC4S,CIC=3-17,BLK=ADMIN,TRRANGE=3;

<RSETCFOPT;

<ENDFILE;

Page 253: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network Siemens

SN2073EU01SN_0002 © 2002 Siemens AG

253

Data in TAC4 <CMDFILE;

<SETCFOPT:ACKCFS=ALL,DANCMD=EXEC,ACKREQ=POS;

<CRDEST:DEST=x622,MINMAX=5-20;

<CRTGRP:TGNO=x622S,OPMODE=BW,GCOS=CCS7IUP&PRIOPRE,SIGVAR=VAR1;

<CRROUTE:DEST=x622,TGNO=x622S,ROUTE=1,DICON=...+091,DINO=D5;

<CRCPT:CODE=622,DEST=x622;

<CRZOPT:CODE=622,ZONO=1,BILLING=AMA&METERING,SUCHCNTR=CNTR1&CNTR2;

<ENTRC7TGREL:TGNO=x622S,DPC=0-5-0,NETIND=INAT0;

<CRTRUNK:TGNO=x622S,LTG=0-4,LC=2-17,LCOS=DIGSIG12,CIC=1-17,TRRANGE=3;

<CANTRDAT:TGNO=x622S,CIC=1-17,BLK=ADMIN,TRRANGE=3;

/

<CRDEST:DEST=x566,MINMAX=5-20;

<CRTGRP:TGNO=x566S,OPMODE=BW,GCOS=CCS7IUP&PRIOPRE,SIGVAR=VAR1;

<CRROUTE:DEST=x566,TGNO=x566S,ROUTE=1,DICON=...+091,DINO=D5;

<CRCPT:CODE=566,DEST=x566;

<CRZOPT:CODE=566,ZONO=1,BILLING=AMA&METERING,SUCHCNTR=CNTR1&CNTR2;

<ENTRC7TGREL:TGNO=x566S,DPC=0-5-1,NETIND=INAT0;

<CRTRUNK:TGNO=TAC4S,LTG=0-3,LC=2-17,LCOS=DIGSIG12,CIC=3-17,TRRANGE=3;

<CANTRDAT:TGNO=TAC4S,CIC=3-17,BLK=ADMIN,TRRANGE=3;

<RSETCFOPT;

<ENDFILE;

Page 254: Ab Number Old of Ewsd

Siemens Administration of the Inter-Exchange Circuit Network

SN2073EU01SN_0002

© 2002 Siemens AG

254